Home

Paradyne 3161-B3 Network Card User Manual

1. NETWORK rote 2 Aee AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK PORT 3 PORT 4 000000 0000000 07777777 CLOCK IN PORT 1 PORT 2 494 14564 Figure 1 5 3164 DSU CSU Rear Panel 00000 COM PORT MODEM NETWORK cu 5 M CLASS 2 AUX PORT COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN 1 NETWORK INPUT 495 14565 01 Figure 1 6 3165 DSU CSU Rear Panel 1 6 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 1 Introduction Table 1 1 Standalone DSU CSU Rear Panel Connectors Name Function POWER Supplies power to the DSU CSU by providing an attachment for the ac power module or the optional dc power cable 24 or 48 Vdc AUX PORT Supports SNMP LAN Adapter or daisy chain connections COM PORT Provides access to a locally connected PC ASCII terminal or printer SNMP management link or async terminal interface MODEM Provides a connection to the integral modem for access to a remotely connected PC ASCII terminal or printer SNMP management link or async terminal
2. D1 NETWORK D2 INTERFACE D3 1 D4 N2 D5 D6 D7 D8 N6 D9 N7 D10 N8 D11 N9 D12 N10 D13 N11 D14 N12 D15 N13 D16 N14 D17 N15 D18 N16 D19 N17 D20 N18 D21 N19 D22 N20 D23 N21 D24 N22 PORTS N23 PRT 1 N24 PRT 2 PRT 3 PRT 4 496 14907 01 Figure 3 6 Example of Channel Allocation 3 30 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 Network Interface 3 Operation Network Channel Allocation 1 D1 N2 D2 N3 D3 N4 D4 N5 D5 N6 N7 N8 N9 D9 N10 D10 N11 D11 N12 D12 N13 D15 N14 Prt1 N15 16 17 Prt3 N18 Prt2 N19 Prt2 N20 Prt2 N21 Prt2 N22 Prt2 N23 Prt2 N24 Prt3 Allocations D1 D24 indicates allocation to DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 channels Prt1 Prt4 indicates allocation to synchronous data ports Figure 3 7 Example of Interface Worksheet for Network Interface February 2001 3 31 3 Operation DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface DTE DSX 1 Channel Allocation D1 N1 D2 N2 D3 NS D4 N4 D5 N5 D6 D7 D8 D9 N9 D10 N10 D11 N11 D12 N12 D13 D14 D15 N13 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24
3. 3 50 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Contents m Acquiring Releasing the User 3 51 Acquiring the Active User 3 52 Releasing the Active User Interface 3 53 Enabling Disabling the Front 3 54 Using the Integral Modem in Standalone DSU CSUs 3 55 Entering Numbers in the Phone Directories 3 55 Initiating a Call for Front Panel Pass Through Operation 3 57 Initiating a Call for PC ASCII Terminal Printer or SNMP 3 59 Disconnecting the Modem Connection 3 60 m Enabling the Communication Port for Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs 3 61 m Deactivating the Alarm Relay for Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs 3 64 m Resetting the DSU CSU 20 0 00 lese 3 65 m Download lt 3 65 User Interface Access Security for Standalone DSU CSUs 3 67 Changing User Interface Access 3 68 4 Maintenance B OVetVIeW 5 oed EX dr d re t ra RE ie 4 1 m Self Test Health 0 0 0 ee 4 1 m Device Health and 5 lt 4 3 m Performance 4 5 Alarms 1e
4. 24 Vdc Return 99 16291 w Chassis Ground Optional DC Power Cable 3160 A2 GB21 90 The dc power cable Figure D 11 DC Power Cable is a 14 5 foot 18 AWG stranded cable The connector is terminated at one end with a 6 position connector The other end of the cable is terminated with a bare wire that should be connected to a dc power source Figure D 11 DC Power Cable shows the wire colors The power source can be either a single source of 24 Vdc or up to two sources of 48 Vdc A and B You cannot connect 24 Vdc and 48 Vdc to the same unit See the installation instructions in Chapter 2 Installation BLACK RED GREEN WHITE ORANGE BLUE 493 14158 Figure D 11 DC Power Cable February 2001 D 15 D Pin Assignments External Clock Interface D 16 The External Clock connector pinouts are in Table D 12 External Clock Connector Table D 12 External Clock Connector Signal Pin Number Shield 1 Clock RS422 only 2 Clock RS422 only 3 Clock In RS423 only 9 Signal Common 11 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 SNMP MIB Objects Overview This appendix describes the Management Information Base MIB objects that are supported by the DSU CSU and provides a correlation between front panel commands and MIB objects Table E 1 SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross Reference The D
5. 3 20 Setting the IP 5 3 21 Selecting the Link Layer 3 23 Specifying the Community Name s and Access Type s 3 24 Configuring SNMP 3 26 Enabling SNMP Trap 3 26 Selecting the Number of Trap 3 27 Configuring a Destination for SNMP 3 28 Configuring DSO 3 29 Displaying DSO Channel Assignments 3 36 Allocating Data lt 3 38 Block or Assignment 3 40 Individual Channel Assignment Method 3 41 Allocating DSO Channels from the DTE Drop Insert Interface to the Network 3 42 Clearing DSO Channel Allocation 3 44 Providing Backup Capability 3 45 Selecting the Timing Source 3 45 Configuring for Network 3 47 Configuring for External 3 47 Establishing Access Security on a 3 48 Setting a Password 3 49 Entering a Password to Gain
6. Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Net DCLB Disab V 54 FT1 Both Port LB Disab DTLB DCLB Both All Ones Disab DTR RTS Both Rcv Yellow None Halt Tx Clock Int Ext InvertTxC Enab Disab InvrtData Enab Disab EDL Enab Disab Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near end Disab Maint Send Both Far end Disab Maint Mgmt Link Enab Disab Prt2 Options Value Default in Bold Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Net DCLB Disab V 54 FT1 Both Port LB Disab DTLB DCLB Both All Ones Disab DTR RTS Both Rcv Yellow None Halt Tx Clock Int Ext InvertTxC Enab Disab InvrtData Enab Disab EDL Enab Disab Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near end Disab Maint Send Both Far end Disab Maint Mgmt Link Enab Disab February 2001 C 45 C Configuration Options C 46 Prt3 Options Value Default in Bold Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Net DCLB Disab V 54 FT1 Both Port LB Disab DTLB DCLB Both All Ones Disab DTR RTS Both Rev Yellow None Halt Tx Clock Int Ext InvertTxC Enab Disab InvrtData Enab Disab EDL Enab Disab Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near end Disab Maint Send Both Far end Disab Maint Mgmt Link Enab Disab Prt4 Options Value Default i
7. E el 88 3 From the Patterns screen select Send Patterns A ps Send Mon A Fs 4 From the Patterns Send screen press F1 to send a QRSS pattern F2 to send a 1 in 8 pattern F3 to send a 511 pattern Patterns Send A lin 511 a 8 GJ If you send a 1 in 8 pattern skip Step 5 5 From the Send screen press the Function key that corresponds to network or the port for which you want to send a test pattern Use the scroll keys if necessary NET does not appear for the 511 pattern Send Name A a Prt A w 1 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 31 4 Maintenance 4 32 The Test Started screen appears Send Name and Dest Test Started 2 m 1 le be If the DSU CSU is already sending the test pattern you selected the message Already active appears If you selected an incompatible test pattern combination the message Invld Test Combo appears See Table 4 9 Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations for valid combinations Table 4 9 Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations QRSS 1 in8 Network QRSS Port Network 511 Port QRSS N A NO NO NO Network QRSS Port NO YES on N A YES on separate ports separate ports 1in8 NO NO N A NO Network 511 Port NO N A N A YES on separate ports Februar
8. 2 From the Lamp Test screen select Abort Lamp Test ZS Abort Start X 8 eji 3 4 36 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Displaying DSU CSU Test Status Use the Test Status command to display the active tests for the DSU CSU Status messages that can display on the front panel LCD are listed in Table 4 10 Test Status Message gt Procedure To display test status 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat 2 From the Status screen press the gt key until the TStat selection appears on the screen 3 Select TStat Status A STest Perf TStat x 1 e The Test Status screen appears showing you what tests are active for the DSU CSU 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 37 4 Maintenance 4 38 Table 4 10 Test Status Message Message Description No Test Active No tests are currently active LLB Test Active The network interface is in Line loopback PLB Test Active The network interface is in Payload loopback DLB Test Active The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port is in DTE loopback RLB Test Active The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port is in Repeater loopback DCLB on Port n Port nis in a Data Channel loopback DTLB on Port n Port nis in a Data Terminal loopback QRSS on Net A QRSS test pattern is being sent on the network interface 1 8 Test Active A 1 in 8 test
9. OK FAIL TEST SIG ALRM EER SIG PDV BPV NETWORK CTS RTS 493 1 4305 2 10 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Operation Overview This chapter contains information for operating your DSU CSU It includes a description of the front panel and sample procedures for configuring the DSU CSU NOTE Additional information for the carrier mounted DSU CSU is located in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Using the Front Panel The standalone DSU CSU front panel Figure 3 1 Standalone DSU CSU Front Panel consists of an LCD a keypad test jacks and 12 LEDs The carrier mounted DSU CSU faceplate contains test jacks and 12 LEDs however the LCD and keypad are located on the Shared Diagnostic Control Panel SDCP of the 3000 Series Carrier For more information about the SDCP refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual NOTE You can display a graphical representation of the DSU CSU front panel on an attached PC see Appendix G Front Panel Emulation 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 1 3 Operation LCD LCD ACCULINK NET EQPT 1 T T OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV Out Out Out NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS 496 14936 Figure 3 1 Standalone DSU CSU Front Panel The LCD Figure 3 2 LCD
10. 4 11 W SNMP Aap tea ee ESI 4 12 m 4 14 E Test Jacks t e LES AL slm Rute 4 17 m Test Commands 0 000 4 19 m Remote Loopback Tests 4 19 Sending a Line Loopback Up or Down 4 20 Sending a V 54 ANSI FT1 Activation Deactivation 4 21 Local Loopback Tests 4 22 Starting a Line 4 23 Starting a Payload 4 24 Starting a DTE 4 25 Starting a Repeater 4 26 Starting a Data Channel 4 27 Starting a Data Terminal 4 28 Aborting 4 29 m TestPatterns 4 csi Se SEE Rs boca et Gee we Ee agn 4 30 Sending Test 5 4 31 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 Contents Monitoring Test 5 4 33 Aborting Test lt 4 34 m Lamp lest ine E e SE Ed 4 35 Starting a Lamp Test s sees teh a e ei e Rex 4 35 Aborting a Lamp Test 4 36 m Di
11. ETHERNET 135 18 2 17 18518 248 SUBNET 135 18 2 0 135 18 2 26 135 18 2 16 Ss 496 14646 02 Figure F 2 Local Carrier with Remote Standalone 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 F 3 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios Scenario 3 This third scenario Figure F 3 Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers shows a local carrier connected to remote carriers that have remote standalones Each carrier must be on a separate subnet but as in the previous scenario the carrier remote combination can share a common subnet Once again the subnet mask is FF FF FF 00 for all devices A static route must be set up in the NMS host for each subnet 135 18 4 0 135 18 6 0 135 18 20 0 135 18 6 22 135 18 20 23 135 18 20 45 135 18 6 34 Sus 85 79 78 n 30 73 S SUBNET 135 18 6 0 3 3 SUBNET 135 18 200 9 6 76 T1 T1 COM IP ADDRESS 7 135 18 40 4 135 18 40 1 795 SUBNET 135 18 40 0 7 SUBNET 135 18 4 0 og 7g Figure F 3 Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers F 4 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios Scenario 4 An alternative addressing scheme for the network is shown in Figure F 4 Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers an Alternative This example uses a subnet mask of FF FF 00 00 for the COM port in the central site carrier only with all of the remaining subnet masks set to FF FF FF 00 The advantage to this scheme is that on
12. 5 5 2 5 m Optional Power Sources 2 5 Installing the 24 Vdc Power 2 5 Installing the Single 48 Vdc Power Supply 2 6 Installing the Redundant 48 Vdc Power Supply 2 7 Cabling Examples 2 8 Power Up 5 2 9 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 Contents 3 Operation ii Overview 3 1 Using the Front Panel 3 1 tae imt LM IA te 3 2 Keypad fel REED Ue ERST 3 3 TeStdacKS ener dens fester ue PEN MERO 3 4 bEEDS senec ote tutores 3 5 Displaying Unit 3 9 Setting Customer Identification 3 11 Selecting the DTE Drop Insert or Data Port for LED Display 3 12 Displaying LED 3 13 Changing Configuration Options 3 14 Displaying Editing Configuration Options 3 16 Saving Edit 3 17 Selecting Copying to a Specific 3 18 Configuring the DSU CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access 3 19 Selecting the Port
13. 5 From the Clear Prf Regs screen press F1 to clear the User registers Clear Prf Regs A User Prti Prt2 x J ej 85 If you selected User the User performance registers are cleared all accumulators are reset to zero and all status registers are cleared The current interval timer the number of valid intervals count and the total 24 hour counts are reset to zero The Command Complete message then appears 4 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Table 4 3 Performance Registers 1 of 2 Register Interval Description Totals Description Event ESF error events counter An error N A event is an ESF frame with either a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC error or an Out Of Frame OOF event The maximum count is 65 535 This register is only reset as a result of a reset command from the network This register is valid for the current interval only CurTimer Current interval timer This register N A records the number of seconds in the current 15 minute interval The maximum is 900 seconds This register is valid for the current interval only Vidintvl N A Valid interval total Records the number of valid 15 minute intervals in the previous x hours where x is 24 hours for aggregate performance and 8 hours for port performance This register is not valid for the current interval ES The number of errored seconds for The total number of errored seconds the
14. 6 When you press F2 from the User Registers screen the User registers for the 24 hour total interval appear User 24 Hour A x ri re rs 4 6 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance 7 When you press F3 from the User Registers screen the interval screen appears Use this screen to choose the specific 15 minute interval User Intvl 01 a te Down A lJ el l9 8 Use the lt and keys to position the cursor under the first or second digit in the interval number displayed then use the F1 Up and F2 Down keys to increment decrement the number 9 When you have selected the number of the interval you want to display press F3 Dsply to display the registers for the interval selected Use the scroll keys to view additional register information User Intvl xx A ES xxx A m You can reset the performance registers via the ClrReg command in the Control branch of the front panel menu February 2001 4 7 4 Maintenance p gt Procedure To clear the performance registers 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen press the gt key until the ClrReg selection appears on the screen 4 Select ClrReg Control A Rel LED _ClrReg
15. ps D E Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB Load Edit Area From Activ Custi Cust2 Fact Fact2 Choose Function Edit Save Activ Custi Cust2 DTE Port NET Chan Gen User Alarm Mgmt Copy Pri Pr2 Pris Gen Trap B Port Select L Al 1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Dsply Clear DTE Prti Prt2 Prt3 Pri4 L L B n A For Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs only For Standalone DSU CSUs only 496 14945 W For 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs only 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 A 1 A Front Panel Menu A 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Technical Specifications Overview 3160 A2 GB21 90 The technical specifications for the standalone DSU CSUs are listed in Table B 1 Models 3160 3164 3165 DSU CSU s Technical Specifications The technical specifications for the carrier mounted DSU CSUS are listed in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide Table B 1 Models 3160 3164 3165 DSU CSU s Technical Specifications Specifications Criteria POWER REQUIREMENTS Typical AC Power Module Optional 24 48 Vdc 48 Vdc Redundant Refer to the labeling on the ac power module for input requirements 20 Vdc 32 Vdc 0 50A 38 Vdc to 60 Vdc 0 25A 38 Vdc to 60 Vdc 0 25A POWER CONSUMPTION AND DISSIPATION 3160 6 5 watts 22 1 Btu per hour at 24 Vdc 6 2 watts 21 3 Btu per hour at 48 Vdc 8 7 watts 29 7
16. The current active user interface has had no activity no key was pressed for at least five minutes W The active user interface has been released with the Release command W The active interface connection is broken This includes the call disconnect for a modem interface or the termination of the front panel emulation program on a locally attached PC if the PC supports DTR or the termination of the async terminal interface on a remote or locally attached terminal 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 51 3 Operation Acquiring the Active User Interface 3 52 To acquire the active user interface press any key If you are using the PC interface use the mouse to click on the desired Function key The top level menu screen appears on the active user interface regardless of what screen was displayed at the previous active user interface DSU ESF ao Stat Test Cnfig 2 el be The inactive interface displays the following message when a Function key is pressed or a connection is made on the inactive user interface and control cannot be switched because the currently active interface is in use On the screen either Ft Panel front panel Com Port Modem or SDCP is displayed in the user interface User field DSU ESF A User I F active 2 a ES The inactive interface displays the following message after control has been released from the previously active
17. Figure 3 4 Test Jacks Standalone DSU CSU February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation LEDs There are twelve LEDs on the DSU CSU front panel The five LEDs on the right Figure 3 5 DSU CSU LEDs are shared between the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface and the data ports Refer to Selecting the DTE Drop Insert or Data Port for LED Display on page 3 12 to choose which port s status the LEDs display NOTE The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS 493 14301 Figure 3 5 DSU CSU LEDs A green LED indicates normal operation A yellow LED indicates a warning for the DTE Drop Insert interface or activity for the data ports Conditions are sampled every tenth of a second The twelve front panel LEDs are grouped into four sections to indicate the status of the m System LEDs Table 3 1 m Network Interface LEDs Table 3 2 m DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface LEDs Table 3 3 m Data Port LEDs Table 3 4 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 5 3 Operation 3 6 Table 3 1 System LEDs Name Color Meaning OK Green Indicates the current operational state of the DSU CSU ON The DSU CSU is operational and has power OFF The DSU CSU is performing a power up self test or a system failure has occurred BLINKING A software download is in progress
18. American Standard Code for Information Interchange The standard for data transmission over telephone lines A 7 bit code establishes compatibility between data services The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters A device that can be attached either locally or remotely to a DSU CSU to display or print alarm messages Data that is formatted so it is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a character and one or more stop bits at the end An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has received an SNMP protocol message that has not been properly authenticated The auxiliary communications port on the DSU CSU February 2001 GL 1 Glossary Auxiliary Backplane AWG B8ZS backup capability bandwidth BES bipolar signal bit bit stuffing block allocation method bps BPV byte CCITT CD channel channel allocation CHAP character CID branch client CLOCK IN interface ClrReg branch Cnfig branch coding GL 2 An 8 slot backplane that fit over one half of the open section of the 3000 Series Carrier This is a passive assembly that provides interconnection capability between 3151 CSUs and 3161 DSU CSUs and provides all interface connectors American Wire Gauge An indication of wire size The heavier the gauge the lower the AWG number and the lower the impedance Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution Encoding scheme for transmit
19. NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 IPBusMast Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Setting the IP Bus Master Specifies whether or not a particular carrier mounted unit is the IP Bus Master There can only be one IP Bus Master per 3000 Series Carrier Typically the carrier mounted unit that has the SNMP Telnet management system connected to it is the IP Bus Master This allows for faster access to the remaining carrier units If an SNMP Telnet management system is connected to another carrier mounted unit i e not the IP Bus Master and the SNMP Telnet management system tries to access another carrier mounted unit the data has to be routed to the IP Bus Master first Once the IP Bus Master receives the data it is routed to the appropriate slot Enab This unit is the IP Bus Master Only one IP Bus Master is allowed per 3000 Series Carrier Disab This unit is not the IP Bus Master NOTE This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 37 C Configuration Options C 38 Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 7 of 7 Def Netwk None Next None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 EDL3 EDL4 Prev Default Network Destination Specifies the default network destination This configuration option specifies where the default network is connected For example if the default network is connected to the commun
20. 2 Press the Z key three times DSU ESF n A Test Cnfig 3 Press the 25 once DSU ESF 2 eS Cnfig lt iS ES The Security screen appears Security A Lvl1 Lvl2 In re 4 Press F1 to select Lvl1 or press F2 to select Lvl2 After you make a selection the top level screen appears If you do not make a selection within 5 minutes the Automatic Device Health Status screen appears 3 68 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Maintenance Overview The DSU CSU can detect and report faults and perform diagnostic tests These features ensure that your DSU CSU is giving you optimum performance in your network Self Test Health Use the Self Test Health command to display the results of the power up self test Possible messages are listed in Table 4 1 Self Test Health Messages See Chapter 2 Installation for more information about power up self test gt Procedure To display power up self test results 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat DSU ESF A Stat Test Cnfig amp 2 From the Status screen select STest Status a DevHS STest Perf x m J 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 1 4 Maintenance 3 View the results of the last power up self test If no problems were found during power up the following message ap
21. 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Sync Data Port Options Port 4 Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Port Type Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Port Base Rate Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Transmit Clock Source Tx Clock Internal External Invert Transmit Clock InvertTxC Enable Disable Invert Transmit and InvrtData Enable Disable Received Data Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones Disable DTR RTS Both Not Ready Action on Network Yellow Rev Yellow None Halt Alarm Network Init Data Channel Net DCLB Disable V 54 FT1 Both Loopback Port DTE Initiated Port LB Disable DTLB DCLB Both Loopbacks Embedded Data Link EDL Enable Disable EDL Management Link Mgmt Link Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 Threshold 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near End Performance Near end Disable Maintain Send Statistics Both Far End Performance Far end Disable Maintain Statistics February 2001 H 19 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation General Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Generate Yellow Alarm Gen Yellow Enable Disable Signals Initial Self Test Self Test Enable Disable Primary Clock Source Clock Src Network DTE Internal External Port 1 External Clock Rate KHz Clock Rate 2048 1544 8 Test Timeout Tst Timeout Enable Disable Te
22. F Facility Data Link FDL configuration option C 8 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 2 4 F 2 Facility Interface Code D Fact1 Factory 1 configuration area functional description 3 14 Fact2 Factory 2 configuration area functional description 3 14 failure analysis See troubleshooting failure message during power up self test 2 10 4 4 troubleshooting 4 15 features 1 1 fractional T1 2 1 2 2 framing configuration option C 2 C 8 front panel acquiring releasing the user interface 3 51 operation 3 1 physical description 1 3 3 1 Front Panel Emulation cabling example 2 8 functional description 1 2 3 1 G 1 installation and operation G 1 G Gen General Configuration branch example of use 3 47 option table C 16 option worksheet C 42 government regulations Canada E government requirements United States D I ID Identity branch example of use 3 9 indicators See LEDs front panel integral modem D IP Internet Protocol addressing configuration option C 34 C 35 C 37 example of use F 1 procedure for configuring 3 21 3 28 K keypad operation 3 3 physical description 1 3 3 1 3160 A2 GB21 90 Index L lamp test 4 35 LAN Adapter 1 3 1 7 2 3 2 4 3 20 F 1 LED Control branch example of use 3 12 LED Status branch example of use 3 13 LEDs front panel during power up self test 2 9 functional description 3 5 lamp test 4 35 physical description 1 3 3 1 line codin
23. SNMP Group Supported Supported for the network interface the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface the synchronous data ports the COM port the AUX port and the MODEM port Interface statistics counters apply to any port COM AUX or MODEM whichever is defined as the SNMP management link Not supported since this group is not supported in MIB II Supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported since the EGP protocol is not supported by the DSU CSU Supported on the T1 interfaces using the DS1 E1 MIB Supported on the synchronous data ports using the RS 232 like MIB Supported on the COM AUX and MODEM ports using the RS 232 like MIB Supported February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects System Group MIB II The System Group objects are fully supported by the DSU CSU The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the System Group where it is not otherwise clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU CSU Objects not mentioned are supported as stated in the MIB System Group sysDescr Object system 1 This object provides the full name and version identification for the system hardware and software This object displays the following string Company Name T1 DSU CSU model xxxx xx xxx S W Release yy yy yy H W 1 zzzz zzz H W CCA2 zzzz zzz Serial number ssssssss Where XXXX Xx Xxx represents the full model number of the
24. SNMP traps are unsolicited messages that are sent from the DSU CSU to an SNMP manager when the DSU CSU detects certain pre specified conditions These traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be sent over the communications link You must specify the number of SNMP managers that are to receive traps from this DSU CSU an IP address for each SNMP manager specified and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU CSU For more information refer to Appendix C Configuration Options and Configuring SNMP Traps in Chapter 3 Operation Trap types consist of the following m General traps Include warmStart and authenticationFailure The DSU CSU sends a warmStart trap after it has been reset to indicate that it has just reinitialized itself The DSU CSU sends an authenticationFailure trap when it has received an SNMP protocol message that has not been properly authenticated These traps are set by the Gen Trap configuration option m Enterprise Specific traps Signify that the DSU CSU has recognized an enterprise specific event See Table 4 4 Enterprise Specific Trap Definitions for enterprise specific traps These traps are set by the Entp Trap configuration option m Link Traps Identify the condition of the communications interface either linkDown one of the communications interfaces has failed or linkUp one of the communications int
25. 3160 A2 GB21 90 The ACCULINK 316x DSU CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital network and the customer premises equipment converting signals received from the DTE Data Terminal Equipment to bipolar signals that can be transmitted over T1 lines Typical applications include shared access to network based services Local Area Network LAN Wide Area Network WAN interconnection and fractional T1 network applications In addition to the T1 network interface and the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface the Model 3160 provides two synchronous data ports while the Model 3164 provides four synchronous data ports The Model 3165 provides one synchronous data port but does not provide the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface The Model 3161 carrier mounted DSU CSU provides two ports in addition to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface and is designed to fit into the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier For more information about the carrier mounted DSU CSU refer to the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The DSU CSU optimizes network performance with a wide range of features such as the following m Software configuration menu displayed via a liquid crystal display LCD to permit quick and easy operation and elimination of complicated hardware strapping m Local or remote configuration and operation flexibility m Several loopback capabilities and test
26. Allocations N1 N24 indicates allocation to network channels Figure 3 8 Example of Interface Worksheet for DTE Drop Insert Interface 3 32 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation DTE Chan Config Assign N1 24 Voice RBS or Data D1 N1 RBS D2 N2 RBS D3 NS RBS D4 N4 RBS D5 N5 Data D6 D7 D8 D9 9 RBS D10 N10 RBS D11 N11 Data D12 N12 Data D13 D14 D15 N13 Data D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 Figure 3 9 Example of RBS Information Worksheet 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 33 3 Operation Port Chan Conf Options Value Assign To NET DTE Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 1 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448
27. D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 February 2001 49 C Configuration Options Port Chan Conf Options Value Default in Bold Assign To NET DTE Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 1 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt3 Prt4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768
28. FAST BLINK The carrier mounted DSU CSU is currently selected by the SDCP FAIL Yellow Indicates a system failure or a self test ON A device error fault is detected or a reset has just occurred OFF No system failures are detected BLINKING A self test is in progress TEST Yellow A system test is in progress ON A loopback or pattern test has been initiated either locally by the network or externally OFF No tests are active Table 3 2 Network Interface LEDs Name Color Meaning SIG Green Monitors the signal being received from the network ON A recoverable signal is being received from the network OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the network a Loss of Signal condition exists OOF Yellow Monitors Out Of Frame OOF conditions on the received network signal ON At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling period ALRM Yellow Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received network signal ON An alarm condition LOS LOF EER Yellow AIS exists on the received network signal Use the Device Health and Status command to determine the alarm type OFF No alarm condition exists on the network interface signal EER Yellow Indicates the Excessive Error Rate EER has been exceeded on the network interface NOTE This LED is only valid when ESF framing is being used ON The EER has been exceeded on the network interface
29. 1 When adding a route to the routing table using SNMP do not specify a value for ipRouteMetric2 IP Group ipRouteProto Object ipRouteEntry 9 This object is a read only object and may have the following values in the DSU CSU m Oother 1 Temporary route added by IP m local 2 Route added or modified as a result of user configuration via the front panel m netmgmt 3 Route added or modified by means of an SNMP set m 4 Route added or modified by Internet Control Management Protocol ICMP m rip 8 Route added or modified by Routing Information Protocol RIP or similar proprietary protocol February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects IP Group ipRouteAge Object ipRouteEntry 10 This object is implemented as a read only object in the DSU CSU In the DSU CSU it reflects the value of the route s time to live in seconds When displays a value of 999 represents a route that is retained permanently For temporary routes the ipRouteAge object decrements over time All routes added via an SNMP set of the ipRouteTable are considered permanent routes These routes do not age but will remain unless deleted via SNMP ICMP Group MIB II The ICMP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU CSU TCP Group MIB The TCP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU CSU with the exception of the tcpConnState object which will be read only UDP Group MIB II
30. 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One If Assign By Chan Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Figure 3 11 Port Channel Configuration Worksheet Ports 3 and 4 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 35 3 Operation NOTE The following procedures are examples only Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the DSU CSU Displaying DSO Channel Assignments Use the Display command in the Channel Configuration branch to view how the DSO channels are currently allocated Line 1 of the display shows the 24 channels of the selected interface Pressing the lt or gt gt key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel listed in Line 1 Symbols used in the display are shown in Table 3 5 Display Channel Symbols Table 3 5 Display Channel Symbols Symbol Meaning The DSO channel is not allocated Prtn The DSO channel is allocated to Port n where n is 1 2 3 or 4 Nn The DSO channel is allocated to the network interface DSO channel n where n can be any number from 1 through 24 Dn The DSO channel is allocated to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interf
31. 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One If Assign By Chan Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 51 C Configuration Options C 52 General Mgmt Options Value
32. 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt3 Prt4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Figure 3 10 Port Channel Configuration Worksheet Ports 1 and 2 3 34 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Port Chan Conf Options Value Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt
33. DSX 1 interface while Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel shown in Line 1 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 37 3 Operation Allocating Data Ports 3 38 By using the configuration options assign a specific port to DSO channels on either the network interface or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface The following methods are available to assign DSO channels to the port Block Allows a block of contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a data port rate and an initial DSO channel the first DSO channel in a block of DSO channels The number of channels assigned is determined by the port rate Only those initial DSO channel numbers that provide enough bandwidth based on the port s data rate are displayed on the screen These channels are automatically assigned to the destination T1 interface Network or DTE Drop Insert when the initial DSO channel is selected ACAMI Alternate Channel Alternate Block Inversion Allows a block of contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a data port rate and an initial DSO channel the first DSO channel in a block of DSO channels However with ACAMI the number of channels assigned is twice the number needed for the port rate This is because with ACAMI every alternate DSO channel starting with the n 1 DSO channel does not carry data from the port but instead always transmits and receives all ones Chan Channel Individually selects the
34. It is recommended that you copy these blank worksheets before using them DTE Options Value Default in Bold DTE Port Enab Disab DTE Framing D4 ESF DTE Coding AMI B8ZS Equal 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Extrn DLB Enab Disab Send Ones Enab Disab Net Options Value Default in Bold NET Framing D4 ESF NET Coding AMI B8ZS LBO 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 ANSI PRM Enab Disab Mgmt Link Enab Disab NET LLB Enab Disab NET PLB Enab Disab BitStuff 62411 Part68 Disab Circuit Ident Edit Clear General Options Value Default in Bold Gen Yellow Enab Disab Clock Src NET DTE Prt1 Int Ext Clock Rate 2048 1544 8 Tst Timeout Enab Disab Tst Duration 1 120 Default 10 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options User Options Value Default in Bold Self Test Enab Disab FP Access Enab Disab FP Pass Enab Disab Dial In Enab Disab Password None Com Modem Both Com Port A Enab Disab Com Use Mgmt ASCII Daisy Term ComExtDev A Disab AT Other ComConnPrefix A Edit Clear ComConnected A Edit Clear ComEscapeSeq A Edit Clear ComEscDel A None 0 2s 0 4s 0 6s 0 8s 1 0s ComDisconnect A Edit Clear Com Type Async Sync Com Clk Int Ext Com Rate 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 1
35. Object ipAddrEntry 2 For some address table entries the ipAdEntlflndex object may have a value greater than ifNumber In these cases the ipAdEntlflndex refers to a proprietary interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group of MIB Il February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects IP Group ipRouteTable Object ip 21 The routing table used by the DSU CSU is supported as a read write table Entries in this table may be added deleted or changed You should exercise great caution when adding or modifying routes in the ipRoutingTable In general it should not be necessary to add or modify routes in the DSU CSU In those cases where it is deemed necessary the routes should only be added to the connected device i e the device closest to the destination Internal routing mechanisms will propagate the route to the other devices An existing route may be effectively deleted by setting the ipRouteType object to invalid for the entry to be deleted An existing route may be modified by changing fields in the desired entry indexed by ipRouteDest of the routing table A new route may be added by specifying values for a table entry for which the index ipRouteDest does not already exist To add a route using an SNMP set you must specify a group of minimal objects These variable bindings must be contained in a single Protocol Data Unit PDU The objects are described in more detail
36. The User Datagram Protocol UDP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU CSU Transmission Group MIB II Objects in the transmission group are supported on the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces the COM port the MODEM port the AUX port and the synchronous data ports The objects in the transmission group are not defined within MIB II but rather through other Internet standard MIB definitions The following two transmission group objects are supported by the DSU CSU dsi transmission 18 The transmission object supported on the T1 interfaces rs232 transmission 33 The transmission object supported on the synchronous data ports COM port AUX port and MODEM port The ds1 transmission object is defined by the DS1 E1 MIB The rs232 transmission object is defined by the RS 232 like MIB 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 13 E SNMP MIB Objects SNMP Group MIB II The SNMP Group objects that apply to a management agent are fully supported by the DSU CSU The following objects apply only to an NMS and return a zero value if accessed m snmplnTooBigs snmp 8 m snmplnNoSuchNames snmp 9 m snmplnBadValues snmp 10 m snmplnReadOnlys snmp 11 m snmplnGenErrs snmp 12 m snmplnGetResponses snmp 18 m snmplnTraps snmp19 m snmpOutGetRequests snmp 25 m snmpOutGetNexts snmp 26 m snmpOutSetRequests snmp 27 DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 The ds1 object defined by RFC 1406 is supported
37. The interface is testing 3 when a test is active on the interface The interface is up 1 when no alarm conditions exist and the interface is enabled The interface is down 2 when an alarm condition is active and the interface is disabled The interface is testing 3 when a test is active on the interface When configured as an SNMP management link up and down are based on the current state of the link layer protocol Otherwise the interface is always up 1 The interface is never in the testing 3 state When configured as an SNMP management link up and down are based on the current state of the link layer protocol Otherwise the interface is always down 2 The interface is never in the testing 3 state When configured as an SNMP management link up and down are based on the current state of the link layer protocol Otherwise the interface is always up 1 when the modem is connected and down 2 when the modem is not connected The interface is never in the testing 3 state The interface is up 1 when the port is assigned to a T1 interface or another data port as a backup and both CTS and DSR are ON The interface is down 2 when the port is unassigned or either CTS or DSR is OFF The interface is testing 3 when a test is active on the interface Interface Group ifLastChange Object ifEntry 9 This object contains the value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational
38. UDP for all management links Therefore set this object to 15 the sum of 1 2 4 8 Interface Group MIB II The Interfaces Group consists of an object indicating the number of interfaces supported by the unit and an interface table containing an entry for each interface The DSU CSU provides an entry in the interface table for the network interface the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface each of the synchronous data ports 1 2 or 4 depending on the model the COM port the AUX port and the MODEM port if they apply The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the Interface Group where it is not clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU CSU Interface Group ifNumber Object interfaces 1 This variable contains the maximum number of MIB II supported interfaces possible across the 31xx Series product line 9 This is different from the MIB description which is defined as the number of interfaces on the particular device This change allows the use of the same iflndexes across all 31xx Series models Interface Group iflndex Object ifEntry 1 This object provides the index into the ifTable and typically into tables in other MIBs also The values of the iflndex object do not vary between models even though not all indexes are supported for a particular model When an unsupported index is accessed noSuchName is returned The following are the values of the iflnde
39. common area of the Enterprise MIB will be fully supported This variable allows the entire contents of one configuration area to be copied into another configuration area February 2001 E 27 E SNMP MIB Objects Correlation between Menu Commands and SNMP Objects Table E 1 SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross Reference provides a correlation between how a function is performed or status is displayed on the front panel and how the same function is accomplished using access to the SNMP database SNMP objects are displayed in bold type while va ues for SNMP objects are displayed in italics Sta Test Cnfig DevHS STest Perf TStat LED ID ACO LED Reset Passwd Mon A Telco User Prtn T1 Prtn Call Rel CirReg CID DL EGPT NET Ripbk Ptrns Lam Mear j Pass Dial Disc ChDir Cur 24Tot Intvl e User Pri Prt2 Pri3 Prt4 Cur 8ht A MM Fd e mcum ntv lo bort Send on gt 15 e irector QRSS n Directory Near Far CEU LLBON GSDNEETUPSETADAN QRSS 1in8 511 DTE Prti Prt2 Prt4 Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB Load Edit Area From Activ Cust Cust2 Facti Fact2 Choose Function Edit Save Activ 2 DTE Port NET Chan Ge
40. is supplied with your standalone DSU CSU Table D 3 Modem Port Interface Signal Pin Number Ring 2 VF Tip 3 493 14157 01 Figure D 4 Integral Modem Cable February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 AUX Port Interface D Pin Assignments The Auxiliary AUX port connects to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet applications or to another DSU CSU s COM port for daisy chain connectivity The SNMP LAN Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the DSU CSU The AUX port connector is an 8 position unkeyed modular connector for the Model 3160 DSU CSU Table D 4 AUX Port Connector for Model 3160 DSU CSUs and a DB25 type socket connector for Model 3164 and 3165 DSU CSUs Table D 5 AUX Port Connector for Model 3164 and 3165 DSU CSUS NOTE For daisy chaining an AUX port to a COM port an 8 pin to 8 pin cable Model 3160 or 25 pin to 8 pin cable Model 3164 or 3165 is required The configuration options Com Use and Aux Use must be set to Daisy Whenever the cable is connected or disconnected change the Com Use and Aux Use configuration options to the correct values Table D 4 AUX Port Connector for Model 3160 DSU CSUs Signal Direction Pin Number DTE Transmit Clock From DSU CSU 1 DTE Receive Data To DSU CSU 2 Signal Ground 3 DTE Transmit Data From DSU CSU 4 DTE Receive Clock From DSU CSU 8 Table D 5 AUX Port Connector f
41. m Change Directory Allows entry of phone numbers into the internal phone directories For additional information refer to User Interface Configuration Options in Appendix C Configuration Options Entering Numbers in the Phone Directories 3160 A2 GB21 90 The DSU CSU has five general directories 1 through 5 and one alarm directory A Use the general directories to store phone numbers for remote devices such as standalone DSU CSUs and ASCII printers Use the alarm directory to store the phone number of the primary ASCII terminal or printer you use to display or print alarms This function is not available for carrier mounted DSU CSUS because the integral modem is not available for carrier mounted DSU CSUs p Procedure To enter or change numbers in the phone directories 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select Call Control A Call Rel LED c 8 February 2001 3 55 3 Operation 4 From the Call Setup screen select ChDir Call Setup A ie Dial ChDir A Gm 1 le The Directory 1 displays first along with its phone number if has been entered 5 Press F1 Next to display the next directory 2 in this case Press F2 Previous to display the previous directory A in this case Directories appear in order 1 through 5
42. threshold for data port Prtn where n is the port number This condition only occurs if the synchronous data port s Embedded Data Link EDL is enabled only available for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs The condition is cleared when the error rate falls below the synchronous data port s configured threshold value PORT IP Down The IP management link is in a down state for PORT where PORT is COM MODEM or AUX This condition occurs if the PORT is configured for Mgmt and communication between the management system and the DSU CSU is not currently possible for this port For the AUX port this condition is detected only when a device reset or power up occurs Selftest failed A failure was detected during the power on self test Select STest in the Stat branch to display more information about the failure DevFail xxxxxxxx An internal error has been detected by the operating software An 8 digit code appears for use by service personnel The condition is cleared by resetting the device Download failed A download attempt was interrupted and failed to complete The condition is cleared by resetting the device February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Table 4 2 Device Health and Status Messages 2 of 2 Message Description Test in progress A test is currently active Select Tstat in the Stat branch to display more test information Modem The integral modem is currently connecte
43. 1 3 4 timing See clocking traps SNMP 1 3 troubleshooting device health 4 3 diagnostic table 4 14 performance 4 5 power up self test 2 10 4 1 TStat Test Status branch example of use 4 37 IN 6 February 2001 U UAS Unavailable Seconds report 4 9 User Configuration branch example of use 3 20 3 61 option table C 18 option worksheet C 43 C 44 user interface acquiring releasing 3 51 V V 35 interface D 12 V 54 Loop 2 4 27 C 4 V 54 Loop 3 4 28 C 4 W warmStart trap 4 12 weight B 2 worksheets configuration option C 42 H 15 X X 21 interface D 13 Y Yellow Alarm condition ASCII terminal printer message 4 11 Device Health and Status message 4 4 front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 Performance Report message 4 10 troubleshooting 4 15 3160 A2 GB21 90
44. 32 bit Internet address written in dotted decimal notation with all the 1s in the network and subnet portions of the address Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals Characters are sent at a fixed rate A term for a digital carrier facility used to transmit a DS1 formatted digital signal at 1 544 Mbps It is used primarily in North America Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The dominant protocol suite in the worldwide Internet TCP allows a process on one machine to send data to a process on another machine using the IP TCP can be used as a full duplex or one way simplex connection Virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols Allows the user of one host computer to log into a remote host computer and interact as a normal terminal user of the remote host One of the ways in which bandwidth can be specified for multiplexer channel groups Time slots are specified by any number from one to twenty four with each time slot equal to 64 kbps A notification message to the SNMP manager when an unusual event occurs on a network device such as a reinitialization Test Status branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Transmit To send signals from a device Transmit Clock V 24 circuit 114 Transmit Data Pin 2 of the EIA 232 interface that is used by the DTE to transmit data to the modem Conversely the modem uses Pin 2 to receive data from the DTE Unavailable Seconds A count of one second interval
45. 8 A Signal Detector 10 B DCE Ready CC 107 From DSU CSU 6 DTE Ready 108 1 2 To DSU CSU 20 Transmit Signal DA 113 To DSU CSU 11 B Element Timing 24 A DTE Source Transmit Signal DB 114 From DSU CSU 12 B Element Timing 15 A DCE Source Receiver Signal DD 115 From DSU CSU 17 A Element Timing 9 B DCE Source Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU CSU 18 Remote Loopback RL 140 To DSU CSU 21 Test Mode TM 142 From DSU CSU 25 D 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments EIA 530 A to RS 449 Cable Interface The EIA 530 A to RS 449 adapter Figure D 7 EIA 530 A to RS 449 Adapter provides the RS 449 interface shown in Table D 8 RS 449 Cable Interface 530 DB25 DB37 449 SIGNAL PLUG SOCKET SIGNAL SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B DTR RLSD A RLSD B DSR SIG COMMON RL LL RCV COMMON TT A TT B TM SIG COMMON SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B DTR A RR A RR B DM A SIG COMMON RL LL RCV COMMON TT A TT B TM 495 14323 01 Figure D 7 EIA 530 A to RS 449 Adapter 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 D 9 D Pin Assignments Table D 8 RS 449 Cable Interface Circuit ITU T Signal Mnemonic Number Direction Pin Shiel
46. 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple C 50 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Port Chan Conf Options Value Default in Bold Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192
47. 90 C Configuration Options Table C 10 Management Trap Configuration Options 3 of 3 Trap I F All Next NET DTE Tis Ports Prev Link Trap Interfaces Specifies which interfaces generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages These traps are supported on the T1 interfaces network and DTE Drop Insert and the synchronous data ports NET Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network interface DTE Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface This selection does not appear if the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled 1 Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network or DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Ports Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the synchronous data ports All Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network interface DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or the synchronous data ports NOTE This configuration option is not available if the Link Trap configuration option is not configured to generate trap messages for linkUp or linkDown events February 2001 C 41 C Configuration Options Configuration Worksheets C 42 This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring your DSU CSU in the network In the tables default settings for Factory 1 are indicated by bold type
48. C 28 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 8 Alarm Configuration Options 2 of 4 DialOut Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Alarm and Trap Dial Out Controls whether generated alarm or trap messages initiate a call if the integral modem connection or carrier external communication port device connection has not already been established When enabled a call is placed to the phone number contained in the alarm directory directory A If the call cannot be completed and the retry option is enabled the alarm or trap message is held until the call is completed or has been retried unsuccessfully once If more than one alarm message is received while waiting for a call retry only the highest priority alarm message received is held all previous messages are discarded When the modem port is configured as the SNMP management link up to 10 SNMP trap messages can be queued at the interface Enab Enables automatic call initiation dial out if an alarm or trap message needs to be sent Disab Disables automatic call initiation Trap messages sent to the modem port or carrier external communication port device are queued held if an integral modem connection or carrier external communication port device connection has not been previously established Alarm messages are not queued NOTE For carrier mounted DSU CSUS this configuration option is only available if the communication port is enabled for an external de
49. CSU for all data paths which currently are configured to carry IP data to or from the DSU CSU including the MODEM COM AUX carrier SNMP bus EDL and FDL All of the objects in the IP Group other than the IP Address Translation table are fully supported The IP Address Translation table ipNetToMediaTable does not apply to the DSU CSU and will be empty i e have zero entries The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the IP Group when it is not clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU CSU IP Group ipForwarding Object ip 1 This object specifies whether the unit is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the forwarding of a datagram received by but not addressed to this unit Only the following value is supported by the DSU CSU m forwarding 1 The unit is acting as a gateway IP Group ipAddrTable Object ip 20 The address table is supported by the DSU CSU IP Group ipAdEntAddr Object ipAddrEntry 1 The ipAdEntAddr object is an IP address supported by the device and serves as the index to the address table Since indexes for tables must be unique only one iflndex may be displayed for each IP address supported by the device If you have configured the same IP address for multiple interfaces or for default IP addresses you will not see all interfaces that support a particular IP address upon display of the ipAddrTable IP Group ipAdEntlflndex
50. Company Name T1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the CSU board AUX AUX port Company Name T1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the CSU Data Ports Data Port n Company T1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the DSU board where n is 1 to 4 Interface Group ifType Object ifEntry 3 This object identifies the type of the interface based on the physical link protocol s immediately below the network layer Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU 8951 Used for the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces m JpropPointToPointSerial 22 Used for the synchronous data ports Used for the MODEM or COM port when the port is not configured as the SNMP management interface ppp 23 Used for the MODEM AUX COM port when the port is configured for PPP 5 28 Used for the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for SLIP Interface Group ifMtu Object ifEntry 4 This object identifies the largest datagram that can be sent or received on the interface It is applicable only to the interface configured as the SNMP management link This object is zero for all other interfaces February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Interface Group ifSpeed Object ifEntry 5 This object provides the interface s current bandwidth in bits per second The value of this object for
51. DTEs can be connected to a port connector using an EIA 530 A to V 35 adapter RS449 Configures the port as an RS 449 compatible interface RS 449 DTEs can be connected to a port connector using an EIA 530 A to RS 449 adapter X 21 Configures the port as an X 21 compatible interface X 21 DTEs can be connected to a port connector using an EIA 530 A to X 21 adapter NOTE If this configuration option is set to X 21 set the All Ones configuration option to RTS or Disab Base Rate Nx64 Next Nx64 Nx56 Prev Data Port Base Rate Allows selection of the base rate for the data port The data rate for the port is a multiple from 1 to 24 of the base rate specified with this configuration option Nx64 Sets the base rate for this port to 64 kbps The data rate is Nx64 kbps where N is a number from 1 to 24 Nx56 Sets the base rate for this port to 56 kbps The data rate is Nx56 kbps where Nis a number from 1 to 24 February 2001 C 3 C Configuration Options C 4 Table C 2 Port Configuration Options 2 of 5 Net DCLB Disab Factory 1 Both Factory 2 Next Disab V 54 FT1 Both Prev Network Initiated DCLB Allows the initiation and termination of a Data Channel Loopback V 54 loop 2 by the receipt of a V 54 DCLB actuate sequence or DCLB release sequence from the network or far end device The sequences may be either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant sequences Disab Ignores the DCLB actuate and
52. Default in Bold SNMP Mgt Enab Disab NMS Valid Enab Disab Num Sec Mgrs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NMS n IP Adr Edit Clear NMS n Access Read R w System Name Edit Clear System Location Edit Clear System Contact Edit Clear CommunityName1 Edit Clear Access 1 Read R W CommunityName2 Edit Clear Access 2 Read R W IP Adr Edit Clear NetMask Edit Clear Com IP Adr Edit Clear Com NetMask Edit Clear Com Link PPP SLIP Modem IP Ad Edit Clear Mdm NetMask e Edit Clear Alt Mdm IP Adr Edit Clear Alt Mdm NetMask Edit Clear Modem Link PPP SLIP Aux IP Adr Edit Clear Aux NetMask Edit Clear IPBusMast A Enab Disab Def Netwk None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDLn February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Mgmt Trap Options Value Default in Bold Num Trap Mgrs 1 2 3 4 5 6 Trapn IP Adr Edit Clear Trapn Dst None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDLn Gen Trap Disab Warm Auth Both Entp Trap Enab Disab Link Trap Disab Up Down Both Trap I F NET DTE T1s Ports All NOTE A circular symbol identifies configuration options that are available on standalone DSU CSUs only A triangular symbol A identifies configuration options that are available on carrier mounted DSU CSUS only February 2001 C 53 C Configuration Options C 54 Februa
53. Delay Time Min Dial Delay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Alternate Dial Out Directory AltDialDir None 1 2 3 4 5 Excessive Error Rate Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10 6 Threshold 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 System Alarm Relay Alrm Relay Enable Disable Management and Communication Communication Protocol Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Node IP Address IP Adr Text Field Clear Node Subnet Mask NetMask Text Field Clear Default Net Destination Def Netwk None Com Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 Communication Port IP Adr Com IP Adr Text Field Clear Communication Port Subnet Mask Com NetMask Text Field Clear Com Link Protocol Com Link PPP SLIP Modem IP Address Modem IP Adr Text Field Clear Modem Subnet Mask Mdm NetMask Text Field Clear Modem Alt IP Adr Alt Mdm IP Adr Text Field Clear Modem Alt Subnet Mask Alt Mdm NetMask Text Field Clear Modem Link Protocol Modem Link PPP SLIP Auxiliary Port IP Address Aux IP Adr Text Field Clear Auxiliary Port Subnet Mask Aux NetMask Text Field Clear IPBusMast IPBusMast Enable Disable February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Management and Communication General SNMP Management Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold SNMP Management SNMP Mgt Enable Disable Community
54. February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to CSU and modem connection to the telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections United States NOTICE TO USERS OF THE UNITED STATES TELEPHONE NETWORK 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment The label is located on the bottom of the standalone 3160 3164 or 3165 DSU CSU and on the 3161 DSU CSU s circuit card If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company 2 There are two types of telephone lines associated with the standalone equipment The T1 network connection should be made using a Universal Service Order Code USOC type RJ48C jack The Service Order Code 6 0F should be specified to the telephone company when ordering the T1 line In addition the proper Facility Interface Code must be specified to the Telephone Company The DSU CSU can be configured to support any of the following framing format and line signaling techniques The DSU CSU s configuration must correspond to the T1 line s parameters The standalone 3160 3164 or 3165 DSU CSU s internal modem connects to the Public Switched Telephone Network using a USOC Type RJ11C jack
55. LLB Loopback A Abort LLB PLB F CA Test Started appears on Line 2 If a line loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 23 4 Maintenance Starting a Payload Loopback The Payload Loopback command PLB loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network The signal is looped back as close to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port as possible after it has passed through the framing circuitry of the DSU CSU Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected DTE ALL pLg NETWORK DSX 1 1s INTERFACE ALL 1 ALL 15 PORT 2 PORT 1 430 1491602 gt Procedure To perform a Payload loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk 2 5 x 1 Bl 3 From the Loopback screen select PLB Loopback a Abort LLB PLB A c 1 e 8 Test Started appears on Line 2 If a Payload loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations 4 24 Febru
56. NET Configures the network interface as the master clock source DTE Configures the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface as the master clock source This selection is not available for 1 port DSU CSUs or if the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled If the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled after making this selection the master clock source is changed to NET Prt1 Configures data port 1 as the master clock source This is the only synchronous data port you can use for the master clock If you enable EDL if for Port 1 and the DSU CSU Clock Source is set to Prt1 the external device must provide clocking of 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate For example if you select 64 kbps the external clock must supply a 56 kbps clock signal Int Configures the internal clock as the master clock source Ext Configures an external clock provided through the Clock In connector as the master clock source This selection is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 6 General Configuration Options 2 of 2 Clock Rate 1544 Next 2048 1544 8 Prev External Clock Rate Specifies the clock rate when the master clock source is configured for external clock Ext This configuration option does not appear when the clock source is not an external clock 2048 Sets the input rate of the external clock to 2 048 k
57. Number Direction Pin Signal Common 102 8 Transmitted Data 103 To DSU CSU 2 A 9 B Received Data 104 From 4 A DSU CSU 11 B Request to Send 105 DSU CSU 3 A 10 B Data Channel Received 109 From 5 A Line Signal Detector DSU CSU 12 B Transmit Signal Element 113 To DSU CSU 7 A Timing DTE Source 14 B Receiver Signal Element 115 From 6 A Timing DCE Source DSU CSU 13 B 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 D 13 D Pin Assignments Serial Crossover Cable Use a serial crossover cable like the one shown in Figure D 10 Serial Crossover Cable with an adapter like that shown in Figure D 10 to connect an external modem to the DSU CSU s COM port Pin 14 P1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Plug Pin 14 y Pin 13 x Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 13 P1 Pin Pin P2 Chassis Ground 1 1 Chassis Ground TXD 2 2 TXD RXD 3 3 RXD RTS 4 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DSR 6 6 DSR Signal Ground 7 7 Signal Ground CD RLSD 8 8 CD RLSD DTR DTR 497 15180a Figure D 10 Serial Crossover Cable D 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments Power Input Connector The input power connector leads are shown in Table D 11 DC Power Connector Pin 1 is at the lower right of the connector and Pin 6 at the upper left as you face the back of the unit Table D 11 DC Power Connector Signal Pin Number 48 Vdc Return 1 2 48 Vdc A 48 Vdc B 24 Vdc
58. OFF The EER has not been exceeded on the network interface February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 NOTE The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs Table 3 3 3 Operation DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface LEDs Name Color Meaning SIG Green Monitors the signal being received from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface ON A recoverable signal is being received from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface a Loss of Signal condition exists OOF Yellow Monitors Out Of Frame OOF conditions on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal ON At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling period ALRM Yellow Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal ON An alarm condition LOS LOF EER Yellow AIS exists on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal Use the Device Health and Status command to determine the alarm type OFF No alarm condition exists on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface signal PDV Yellow Monitors Pulse Density Violations PDV on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal ON At least one PDV was detected and corrected on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal during the
59. Out Of Frame condition has persisted for more that 2 5 seconds i e Red Alarm m dsx1LossOfSignal 64 A Loss of Signal condition has persisted for more that 2 5 seconds i e Red Alarm m dsx1LoopbackState 128 The near end of the T1 interface is in a loopback state m dsxiOther Failure 4096 An Excessive Error Rate EER has been detected on the network interface Near End Group dsx1SignalMode Object dsx1ConfigEntry 11 This object specifies whether Robbed Bit Signaling RBS is being used This object differs from the MIB definition in that it is read only not read write for DSU CSUs Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m none 1 No signaling is being used on this interface m robbedBit 2 Robbed Bit Signaling is being used on at least one DSO on this T1 interface E 16 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Near End Group dsx1TransmitClockSource Object dsx1ConfigEntry 12 This object specifies the timing source for the transmit clock for this T1 interface This object differs from the MIB definition in that it is read only not read write for DSU CSUs Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m loopTiming 1 The recovered receive clock is being used as the transmit clock m localTiming 2 The DSU CSUS internal clock is used being as the transmit clock m ThroughTiming 3 The recovered receive clock from anothe
60. Pinouts 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 2 7 2 Installation Cabling Examples The DSU CSU is supplied with an ac power module and a VF cable for the integral modem Optional cables are described in Appendix D Pin Assignments Figure 2 12 Cabling Examples illustrates some cabling examples TERMINAL f X SNMP E E MANAGER MODEM H s PORT FRONT 7 3164 DSU CSU PANEL COM MODEM NETWORK 5 y PORT PORT 0000 3160 DSU CSU NETWORK PORT NETWORK 3164 DSU CSU POWER T1 OR SERIAL CONNECTIONS SNMP DIAL CONNECTIONS MANAGER TERMINAL 99 16250 Figure 2 12 Cabling Examples 2 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 2 Installation Power Up Self Test After you connect the DSU CSU to a power source the unit performs the power up self test to ensure that it is in good working order The DSU CSU performs this test on itself upon power up or after a device reset unless it has been disabled by the Self Test configuration option see Appendix C Configuration Options The self test includes a basic processor test a limited memory test a code checksum test and basic verification tests of the internal components The front panel LCD displays the progress and pass fa
61. Prt2 Prt3 and Prt4 appear for 4 port DSU CSUs Use this feature to designate a port as a backup port You can attach an external backup device to Prtn and manually assign the selected port to the backup port i e route data from the selected port to the backup port When a port is assigned to another port DSR is turned on Selecting Prtn and Next takes you directly to the Port Rate configuration option bypassing the Assign By configuration option EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS does not operate when a synchronous data port is assigned to another synchronous data port Therefore if EDL is enabled it is ignored NOTE Changing this configuration option from one T1 interface to the other NET or DTE deallocates all DSO channels assigned to the previous interface Assign By Block Next Block Chan Prev Data Port Channel Allocation Method If NET or DTE is selected using the Assign To configuration option this configuration option designates the method for assigning DSO channels to the destination T1 interface Block Allocates DSO channels to this port by the block method Allocates DSO channels to this port by the Alternate Channel Alternate Mark Inversion method The difference between block and is that the number of channels allocated with ACAMI is double the number needed for the port rate With ACAMI every alternate DSO channel does not carry data from the port but always transmits and
62. Rel LED A 4 From the Call Setup screen select Disc Call Setup A Disc ChDir A 8 lej amp The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen appears Disconnect 2 Command Complete x ri re rs February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation p gt Procedure To disconnect a modem connection using two front panel keys 1 Press the X and A keys simultaneously and hold for two seconds Call Setup A ChDir G 1 2 85 C The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen appears Enabling the Communication Port for Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs Communication between the carrier mounted DSU CSUs and an external PC ASCII device SNMP manager or async terminal interface attached either locally or through an external modem occurs through a shared communication COM port For COM port cabling information refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Unlike standalone DSU CSUS the carrier mounted DSU CSUS do not have a dedicated COM port for external access Once the COM port is enabled other COM port configuration options can be selected These options are used to configure Port 2 on the Auxiliary Backplane as a COM port for the carrier NOTE If a Model 3161 DSU CSU has the COM port enabled Port 2 cannot be used as a data port p Procedure To enable the COM port on the c
63. Table C 1 DTE Interface Configuration Options 2 of 2 Extrn DLB Disab Next Enab Disab Prev DTE Loopback on External Contact Allows the control of a DTE Loopback DLB by an external contact on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Enab Allows the DSU CSU to begin a DLB when the external contact is closed The DSU CSU remains in DLB as long as the contact remains closed Disab Prevents the state of the external contact from affecting the operation of DLB Send Ones Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Send All Ones on DTE Failure Specifies the action to take on the signal transmitted to the network when a valid signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface due to an LOS OOF or AIS condition Enab Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the network interface when an LOS AIS or OOF condition occurs on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Disab Passes the data unchanged to the network interface channels Port Configuration Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 Table C 2 Port Configuration Options 1 of 5 Port Type E530 Factory 1 V 35 Factory 2 Next E530 V 35 RS449 X21 Prev Data Port Type Allows selection of the data port interface type E530 Configures the port as an EIA 530 A compatible interface EIA 530 A DTEs can be directly connected to a port connector on the back of the DSU CSU V 35 Configures the port as a V 35 compatible interface V 35
64. This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A This configuration option is not available if the communications port is disabled Carrier Detect CD is used to detect that the external device s connection is lost Therefore do not allow the CD lead to be forced on by the external device The external device should be strapped to ignore Data Terminal Ready DTR ComConnPrefix Next Edit Clear Prev Carrier Communication Port Connect Prefix Specifies the connect prefix to the dial directory phone number When you make a connection or the DSU CSU automatically makes a connection dial out alarms or traps through the communication port the connect prefix and the dial directory phone number are used to establish the connection The connect prefix is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length If the connect prefix is NULL then no connect prefix is used Edit Allows you to edit and or display the connect prefix using the generic text string entry screen Clear Allows you to clear the connect prefix The connect prefix is set to a null string NOTES This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is set to AT or the communication port is disabled f ComExtDev is configured for Other and the external device requires characters after the dial phone number you
65. Totals Description LOFC The loss of frame count for the The total loss of frame count for the current interval This is a count of previous x hours where x is the number of times that an LOF is 24 hours for aggregate performance declared The maximum count is and 8 hours for port performance 255 CSS The number of controlled slip The total number of controlled slip Not valid seconds for the current interval seconds for the previous x hours for Port where x is 24 hours for aggregate registers performance and 8 hours for port performance StEvnt The status events register records N A Only valid whether one or more of the for User following events have occurred at registers least once during the interval The event is identified by a letter as follows Y A Yellow Alarm signal has been received on the network interface L Loss Of Signal has occurred on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface E The Excessive Error Rate threshold has been exceeded F A Frame Synchronization Bit Error has been detected V A Bipolar Violation has been detected If none of these events occurred during the interval StEvnt none will be displayed Complete Bad line conditions or loopback N A Only valid tests may prevent far end port for far end statistics from reaching the port DSU CSU This field indicates registers whether the 15 minute interval contains 900 seconds of statistics If one or more seconds of far end statisti
66. a Password Select Save to store this setting in nonvolatile memory The Save Configuration To screen appears From the Save Configuration To screen select Current The password itself is set separately Refer to the following section Setting a Password on page H 13 main config user com Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS Port Use Terminal Enable Port Type Asynchronous Password Data Rate Kbps t Character Length Parity Stop Bits Ignore Control Leads Password Required Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time Minutes Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Figure H 8 Enabling a Password February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Setting a Password In addition to establishing access security on a port refer to the previous section Establishing Access Security on a Port on page H 12 the password itself is set Unless you specify otherwise the password is null gt Procedure To set a password 1 From the Main Menu screen select Control The Control screen appears 2 From the Control screen select Administer Password The Password Entry screen appears Figure H 9 Setting a Password This screen is used to add a new password or modify an existing password 3 Enter a new password in the Password field The password may be 1 to 8 characters long and may contain the characters 0 throug
67. a particular synchronous data port back to the port just before it is combined with the rest of the T1 data stream Dual Tone Multi Frequency A signaling method using two voice frequencies to designate the tones used for touch tone dialing as distinguished from pulse dialing Data Terminal Ready A signal from the DTE to the modem sent via Pin 20 of the EIA 232 interface V 24 circuit 108 1 2 that indicates the DTE is turned ON and connected to the modem A wideband digital interface operating at 2 048 Mbps defined by ITU recommendations G 703 and G 704 It is used primarily outside North America Embedded Data Link The 8 kbps in band performance channel that provides 4 kbps of user bandwidth for the support of an SNMP management link Excessive Error Rate An error rate that is greater than the threshold that has been configured in the device February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 EIA EIA 530 A Enterprise MIB enterprise specific trap EON error ES ESD ESF Fact1 Fact2 failure fault FCC FDL fractional E1 frame frame relay framing Generic Interface Extension MIB Get command SNMP ground HDLC host Hz 3160 A2 GB21 90 Glossary Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry to ensure uniformity of interface between DTEs and DCEs An Electronic Industries Association standard for a high speed 25 position DCE D
68. address assigned to an internet host International Standards Organization International Telecommunications Union The telecommunications agency of the United Nations established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices Before March 1993 it was called CCITT Kilobits per second One kilobit is usually taken to be 1 024 bits Local Area Network A privately owned and administered data communications network limited to a small geographic area Line Build Out The amount of attenuation of the transmitted signal that is used to compensate for the length of wire between the transmitter and the receiver Liquid Crystal Display Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that messages can be displayed Link Control Protocol Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g an alarm The protocol that regulates the communication between two network nodes A trap that identifies the condition of the communications interface linkDown or linkUp traps Line LoopBack A test in which the received signal on the network interface is looped back to the network without change Loss of Frame Occurs when a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval Loss Of Frame Count The number of LOFs declared A test that
69. allocating DSO channels as a group so that every alternate DSO channel does not carry data but instead transmits and receives all ones A product family and a registered trademark of Paradyne Alarm Cut off command A command for carrier mounted DSU CSUS that forces a deactivation of the alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier Active configuration area The configuration option set that is currently active for the device Before a configuration option set becomes active you must save the set to the Active configuration area Hardware that provides some transitional function between two or more devices A symbol usually numeric that identifies the interface attached to a network A software program housed within a device to provide SNMP functionality Each agent stores management information and responds to the manager s request for this information A single bit stream that combines two or more bit streams Alarm Indication Signal An all ones signal transmitted to maintain transmission continuity and to indicate to the receiving terminal that a transmission fault exists at either the transmitting terminal or upstream of the transmitting signal Sometimes referred to as Blue Alarm Alternate Mark Inversion A line coding technique used to accommodate the ones density requirements of E1 or T1 lines American National Standards Institute A member of ISO ANSI accredits and implements standards The use to which a device is put
70. and sections in alphabetical order Product Related Documents Document Number 3000 A2 GA31 Document Title COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3000 A2 GB41 COMSPHERE 48 VDC Central Office Power Unit Installation Guide 3100 A2 GK40 ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide 3162 A2 GB20 3163 A2 GB20 3166 A2 GB20 ACCULINK 3162 DSU CSU User s Guide ACCULINK 3163 DSU CSU User s Guide ACCULINK 3166 DSU CSU User s Guide Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product documentation Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals viii February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 About This Guide Reference Documents 3160 A2 GB21 90 AT amp T Technical Reference 54016 AT amp T Technical Reference 6241 1 ANSI T1 403 1989 Industry Canada CS 03 CSA 22 2 No 950 Industry Canada ICES 003 FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 UL 1950 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP Based Internets MIBII RFC 1213 March 1991 Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types RFC 1406 January 1993 Definitions of Managed Objects for RS 232 like Hardware Devices RFC 1317 April 1992 Extensions to the Generic Interface MIB RFC 1229 May 1991 February 2001 ix About This Guide x February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Introduction Overview Features
71. at Net appears Facility problem Contact your facility provider BPV LED is ON 1 Incompatible line coding format between the DTE and the DSU CSU 2 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable problem 1 Check that the line coding format for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is correct 2 Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends A failure message appears followed by an 8 digit code XXXXXXXX Internal DSU CSU problem Record the 8 digit code then contact your service representative Mgmt link is down 1 The manager configuration is mismatched with the DSU CSU configuration 2 The managers link layer protocol is not running 1 Check that the configurations are matched 2 Start the link layer protocol No SNMP communication via the AUX port 1 Cable problem 2 The link layer protocol is not running 1 Check that the cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Change the Aux Use configuration option to None and then back to SNMP or Daisy as appropriate Invalid Number The modem cannot dial because the phone number is invalid or there is no number in the selected directory Check that the selected phone number is correct February 2001 4 15 4 Maintenance Table 4 6 Troubleshooting 3 of 3 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No Dial Tone The modem cannot dial because Check that the modem is there is
72. configuration options for the T1 interfaces on the DSU CSU Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m dsx1ESF 2 Indicates ESF framing m dsx1D4 2 Indicates D4 framing Near End Group dsx1LineCoding Object dsx1ConfigEntry 6 This object corresponds to the NET Coding DTE Coding configuration options for the T1 interfaces on the DSU CSU Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m dsx1B8ZS 2 Indicates B8ZS line coding m dsx1AMI 5 Indicates AMI line coding Near End Group dsx1SendCode Object dsx1ConfigEntry 7 This object specifies the test patterns codes being sent over the network interface These tests are not supported on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m dsx1SendNoCode 1 Specifies that the interface is sending normal or looped data Setting the interface to this value stops an active send pattern test on the interface This is the only value supported by the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface m dsx1SendLineCode 2 Specifies that the network interface is sending a Remote Loopback Rlpbk LLBUP code The code is sent for 10 seconds m dsx1SendResetCode 4 Specifies that the network interface is sending Remote Loopback Rlpbk LLBDN code The code is sent for 10 seconds m dsx1SendQRS 5 Specifies that the network interface is sending QRSS test pattern The pattern is sent until the test is ha
73. current interval An errored for the previous x hours where x is second is any second with one or 24 hours for aggregate performance more ESF error events The and 8 hours for port performance maximum is 900 seconds UAS The number of unavailable seconds The total number of unavailable for the current interval An seconds for the previous x hours unavailable second is any one where x is 24 hours for aggregate second interval when service is performance and 8 hours for port unavailable Detection occurs with performance 10 consecutive unavailable seconds The maximum is 900 seconds SES The number of severely errored The total number of severely errored seconds for the current interval A seconds for the previous x hours severely errored second is any where x is 24 hours for aggregate second with 320 or more CRC performance and 8 hours for port errors or any second with one or performance more OOF events The maximum is 900 seconds BES The number of bursty errored The total number of bursty errored seconds for the current interval A seconds for the previous x hours bursty errored second is any where x is 24 hours for aggregate second with more than one butless performance and 8 hours for port than 320 CRC errors The performance maximum is 900 seconds 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 9 4 Maintenance 4 10 Table 4 3 Performance Registers 2 of 2 Register Interval Description
74. dB ANSI PRM Selectable Bit Stuffing FCC Part 68 AT amp T TR 62411 Yellow Alarm Generation Selectable LOOPBACKS Standard Additional AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1989 RLB Repeater Loopback DLB DTE Loopback V 54 Loop 2 and Loop 3 ANSI T1 403 Annex B Fractional T1 Loopback PORT INTERFACE Standards EIA 530 A V 35 RS 449 X 21 Rates Nx64 64K 1 536 Mb Nx56 56K 1 344 Mb APPROVALS Refer to the product labeling CLOCKING SOURCES T1 network interface Port 1 internal clock or for Models 3160 3164 DSU CSUs DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or external clock MODEM INTERFACE Physical Interface Rate Integral Dial Modem RJ11C USA CA11A Canada 2400 bps V 22 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Configuration Options Overview 3160 A2 GB21 90 The DSU CSU configuration option tables contain a list of all configuration options and their available selections The configuration options are arranged into functional groups DTE Interface Configuration Options The DTE Interface configuration options configure the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface on the DSU CSU Table C 1 DTE Interface Configuration Options Port Configuration Options The Port configuration options configure the synchronous data ports on the DSU CSU Table C 2 Port Configuration Options Network Interface Configuration Options The Network Interface configuration options configure the
75. disables the data port when Yellow Alarms are received on the network interface When Yellow Alarms are received all ones are sent on the Received Data interchange circuit BB CCITT 104 The Clear to Send interchange circuit CB CCITT 106 is interrupted Tx Clock Int Next Int Ext Prev Data Port Transmit Clock Specifies whether the transmitted data for the port is clocked using an internal clock provided by the DSU CSU synchronized to the clock source specified by the clock source configuration option in the General configuration option group or an external clock provided by the DTE connected to the port When an external clock is used it must be synchronized to the same clock source as the DSU CSU Int Indicates the clock is provided internally by the DSU CSU on the TXC interchange circuit DB CCITT 114 Ext Indicates the clock is provided externally by the DTE on the XTXC interchange circuit DA CCITT 113 Use this selection when the clock source is set to this data port InvertTxC Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Invert Transmit Clock Specifies whether the clock supplied by the DSU CSU on the TXC interchange circuit DB CCITT 114 is phase inverted with respect to the Transmitted Data interchange circuit BA CCITT 103 This configuration option is useful when long cable lengths between the DSU CSU and the DTE are causing data errors Enab Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU CSU on this port is phase inverted Di
76. disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the MoDiscTm configuration option Disab The modem port does not disconnect due to inactivity NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only MoDiscTm 5 Next Up Down Save Prev Modem Port Disconnect Time Specifies the period of time 1 to 60 minutes before the modem port disconnects due to inactivity The MolnActTm configuration option must be set to Enab Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change Use the Function keys Up or Down to increment or decrement the digit Up Increments the time delay Down Decrements the time delay Save Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Aux Use None Next None Mgmt Daisy Prev Auxiliary Port Use Specifies how the auxiliary port is used The auxiliary port only supports Point to Point Protocol PPP with the following parameters type is asynchronous character length is 8 parity is none and stop bit is 1 None Specifies that the auxiliary port is not to be used Mgmt Configures the auxiliary port as the link to an SNMP manager or Telnet client via an external LAN Adapter Daisy Configures the auxiliary port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy chained to the communication port of an another 31xx Series device NOTE This co
77. each interface is specified as follows T1 Interfaces 1 544 000 bps COM AUX and The currently configured data rate for the port MODEM Data Ports The currently configured data rate for the port when the port is allocated to one of the T1 interfaces If the port is not allocated the data rate is defined as zero Interface Group ifAdminStatus Object ifEntry 7 This object specifies the desired state configuration of the interface This object is supported only for the COM and MODEM ports It provides the ability to switch between using the port for SNMP or ASCII operations dial out front panel emulation The value of this object will not affect the state of any of the interfaces on the DSU CSU other than the COM or MODEM port Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m up 1 The SNMP management link is active on the COM or MODEM port m testing 3 The SNMP management link is inactive on the COM or MODEM port These ports can be used for proprietary ASCII functions February 2001 E 7 E SNMP MIB Objects Interface Group ifOperStatus Object ifEntry 8 This object specifies the current operational state of the interface The value of this object for each interface is defined as follows Network T1 1 COM Port AUX Port MODEM Port Data Ports The interface is up 1 when no alarm conditions exist The interface is down 2 when an alarm condition is active
78. for both the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces The DS1 Near End Group and DS1 Fractional Group are supported for both interfaces The DS1 Far End Group is not supported Near End Group DS1 E1 MIB The DS1 Near End Group consists of the following four tables m 051 Configuration m 051 Current DS1 Interval m DS1 Total All four tables are fully supported for the network interface Since statistics are not kept for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface only the DS1 Configuration table is fully supported The statistic objects for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface entry in the DS1 Current DS1 Interval and DS1 Total tables are always zero null The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the Near End Group when it is not clear how the object definition in the DS1 E1 MIB is related to the DSU CSU E 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Near End Group dsx1TimeElapsed Object dsx1ConfigEntry 3 Applies to the network interface only An error status is returned if access is attempted for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Near End Group dsx1Validintervals Object dsx1ConfigEntry 4 Applies to the network interface only An error status is returned if access is attempted for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Near End Group dsx1LineType Object dsx1ConfigEntry 5 This object corresponds to the NET Framing DTE Framing
79. information exchange The T1 network interface connector on the rear panel of the DSU CSU Network Management System A computer system used for monitoring and controlling network devices A connection or switching point on the network A specific item within a Management Information Base MIB Out Of Frame An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error A hardware or software function that can be selected or enabled as part of a configuration process Password Authentication Protocol A security technique that requires a user password for access to a system A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of one Private Branch Exchange Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network Personal Computer Protocol Data Unit A message containing protocol specific information Pulse Density Violation The number of ones marks pulses is not adequate for the line requirement Performance Report branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Payload Loopback Loopback mode that loops the information received on the T1 network interface back to the network after it has passed through receive and transmit framing section The synchronous data port interface on the DSU CSU The power input connector on the DSU CSU A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a re
80. interface NETWORK Provides access to the T1 network DTE Model 3160 3164 Provides access to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface CLOCK IN Models 3160 3164 Used to attach an external clock to the DSU CSU PORTs 1 4 Used to connect the customer s synchronous data DTE to the DSU CSU February 2001 1 7 1 Introduction 1 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Installation Overview This chapter contains information for installing your standalone DSU CSU It includes application examples cabling and power up information NOTE Installation instructions for the carrier mounted DSU CSU are located in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Application Examples The DSU CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital network and the customer s equipment The DSU CSU is connected to the customer s equipment through one of the synchronous data ports PORTs 1 4 or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface It is connected to the T1 digital network through the network interface NOTE The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs Some common applications for the DSU CSU are m Point to Point LAN interconnection Figure 2 1 Point to Point Application Example m Shared access to network based services Figure 2 2 Shared Access Application Example m Fractional
81. interface and another interface has not become active DSU ESF A User I F idle 2 1 2 5 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Releasing the Active User Interface To release the current active user interface either allow five minutes to elapse without pressing any key or use the Release command p Procedure To use the Release command 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select Rel Release Control A Call Rel LED Je Bt amp The active user interface is released The message Released appears No user interface is active until input is received from a user interface 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 53 3 Operation Enabling Disabling the Front Panel You can enable or disable the display of information on the front panel This feature is useful for ensuring that other users do not inadvertently change the device s configuration options while you are using an external device e g a PC or async terminal The factory default is Enable 3 54 NOTE If you disable the front panel be sure not to alter the configuration options for using an external device e g a PC or async terminal If this happens you lose the ability to communicate with the device You will need to contact your service representative p Proced
82. must append the characters to the phone number C 20 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 4 of 10 ComConnected Next Edit Clear Prev Carrier Communication Port Connect Indication String Specifies the communication port s connect indication string When you make a connection or the DSU CSU automatically makes a connection dial out alarms or traps through the communication port this string determines that the connection has been established The connect indication string is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length If the connect indication string is not received within 1 minute it will time out the connection If the connect indication string is NULL the communication port s receive data stream is not searched and a transition in the Carrier Detect CD lead is used to determine that a connection has been established Edit Allows you to edit and or display the case sensitive connect indication string using the generic text string entry screen Clear Allows you to clear the connect indication string The connect indication string is set to a null string NOTES This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is set to AT or the communication port is disabled ComEscapeSeq Next Ed
83. network interface on the DSU CSU Table C 3 Network Interface Configuration Options Channel Configuration Options The Channel configuration options configure the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 and synchronous data port channel allocations on the DSU CSU Table C 4 DTE Channel Configuration Options and Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options General Configuration Options The General configuration options configure alarms and clocks on the DSU CSU Table C 6 General Configuration Options User Interface Configuration Options The User Interface configuration options configure and control the DSU CSU user interfaces Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options Alarm Configuration Options The Alarm configuration options specify how alarm conditions are handled by the DSU CSU Table C 8 Alarm Configuration Options February 2001 C 1 C Configuration Options m Management Configuration Options The Management configuration options configure the DSU CSU for SNMP or Telnet access Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options and Table C 10 Management Trap Configuration Options The configuration tables include a description of each configuration function and its available selections In the tables the top line of each configuration option entry indicates the factory default setting DTE Interface Configuration Options C 2 NOTE These configuration options are only available for 2 port and 4 por
84. only Loss of primary data could result from improper use 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 65 3 Operation 3 66 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation User Interface Access Security for Standalone DSU CSUs 3160 A2 GB21 90 NOTE This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of the security access levels and their selection The user interface access security option allows you to limit access to the DSU CSU to display only and non intrusive functions The user access security function is not available for carrier mounted DSU CSUs Level 1 Lvl1 access security allows access to all functions available through the menu tree This is the default setting Level 2 Lvl2 access security restricts access to only those functions that cannot affect the operation of the DSU CSU in any way At this level W None of the functions in the Test or Ctrl branches are available m All functions on the Stat branch are available m All functions on the Cnfg branch are available for display but they cannot be used to save to a configuration area You can only reach the screen that controls security access using the front panel February 2001 3 67 3 Operation Changing User Interface Access Security p gt Procedure To change user interface access security 1 Press the amp key two times from the top level screen DSU ESF 5 A Stat Test Cnfig Ee ee 885
85. or devices A 25 position connector used on cables or devices Data Communications Equipment The equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection It also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the network Data Channel LoopBack Loops the data received from the network interface for all DSO channels allocated to the selected port back to the network A factory preset value that is assumed to be correct unless changed by the user Device Failure A message that indicates that an internal failure has been detected by the operating firmware An 8 digit code appears for use by service personnel Device Health and Status branch of the DSU CSU menu tree February 2001 GL 3 Glossary device digital signal diskette DL branch DLB download downstream device drop insert DSR DSU DSX 1 DSO DSO channel allocation DS1 DS1 E1 MIB DTE DTE Drop Insert interface DTLB DTMF DTR 1 EDL EER GL 4 A mechanical electrical or electronic unit with a special purpose A signal composed of only two discrete values representing the binary digits 0 and 1 A thin flexible magnetic disk enclose in a protective jacket Download branch of the DSU CSU menu tree DTE Loopback Loopback mode that loops the information received on the DTE T1 network interface back to the network as close to the network interface as possible
86. or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface depending on which destination was chosen This example assumes that the network is the destination Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel shown in Line 1 Pressing the lt or gt key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three Select the channel by pressing the Function key under the desired number Portn appears The port is assigned to that channel To deallocate a port press the Function key under that port number Pressing the Function key under channels assigned to other ports has no effect N1 A Next Prti Prt2 S Allocating DSO Channels from the DTE Drop Insert Interface to the Network Interface By using the configuration options you can allocate DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to the network interface and specify which DSO channels carry Robbed Bit Signaling RBS information for voice channels p Procedure To allocate DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to the network interface 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Chan selection appears on the screen 5 Select Chan Edit A Port NET Chan A c e 6 From th
87. part of the building installation shall be incorporated in fixed wiring The disconnect device a 24 or 48 Vdc 15 or 20 A circuit breaker or switch must be included in the ungrounded supply conductor Over current protection must be a 24 or 48 Vdc 15 or 20 A fuse or circuit breaker EMI Notices A UNITED STATES EMI NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modifications will be made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne Corporation A CANADA EMI NOTICE This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference causing equipment regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du r glement sur le mat rial brouilleur du Canada C
88. pattern generators m DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 capability m Alarm message display print capability m Front panel emulation via Windows based Front Panel Emulation software m Integral modem for standalone DSU CSUs February 2001 1 1 1 Introduction m Asynchronous async terminal interface support m Telnet access for remote async terminal operations m Network management provided through industry standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface The DTE Drop Insert interface allows DTEs PBXs that support the 051 signal format to share the T1 network with other high speed equipment This is available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs Alarm Message Capability The DSU CSU can be attached either locally or remotely to an ASCII terminal or printer to display or print alarm messages Alarms can also be displayed on a PC that is using a terminal emulation package Front Panel Emulation Integral Modem The DSU CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is similar to that provided by the DSU CSU front panel The functionality of the front panel is available by clicking on the function keys with the mouse rather than by pressing keys from the actual front panel The standalone DSU CSUS contain an integral low speed 2400 bps V 22bis dial modem that enables communication with remote devices such as another 316x DSU CSU an ASCII terminal or printer or a PC running t
89. pattern is being sent on the network interface QRSS on Port n A QRSS test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels allocated to port n 511 on Port n A 511 test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels allocated to port n Mon QRSS Net A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the network interface Mon QRSS Port n A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the channels allocated to port n Mon 511 Port n A 511 test pattern is being monitored on the channels allocated to port n DLB Test Extrn The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port is being held in DTE loopback by the external contact Lamp Test Active The Lamp test is currently active February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Front Panel Menu Su Tesi DevHS STest Perf TStat LED ID ACO LED Reset Passwd Mon A Telco User Prtn T1 Prtn Call hel a CID DL EQPT NET Ripbk Ptrns Lam Nea Tal P E Pass Dial Disc ChDir Cur 24701 User Prti 2 Pr3 Pri4 Cur 8701 A rd ee ur 8Tot bort Send on Th 15 e irector QRSS a Directory Near Far PEBUPEEBOM EE QRSS 1in8 511 DTE Prti Prt2 Prt4
90. port DSU CSUs This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled If the local DSU CSU is configured to send near end performance statistics then the remote device must be configured to maintain far end performance statistics Far end Disab Next Disab Maint Prev Far End Performance Statistics Specifies whether to monitor for far end performance report messages PRMs and maintain far end performance registers for a particular port Disab Disables far end performance statistics Maint Monitors the port s EDL for PRMs and maintains far end performance statistics NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled Ifthe local DSU CSU is configured to maintain far end performance statistics then the remote device must be configured to send near end performance statistics Mgmt Link Disab Next Enab Disab Prev EDL Management Link Specifies whether the EDL management link is enabled for a particular port Selecting Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps in band data link provided by EDL Enab Enables the ports EDL management link Disab Disables the ports EDL management link NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled or the FDL is enabled Ifthe lo
91. receives all ones Chan Allocates DSO channels to this port by the individual channel method NOTE Changing this configuration option from one method to another Block ACAMI or Chan deallocates all DSO channels assigned to either the network interface or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface C 12 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options 2 of 4 Port Rate 384 Next 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Prev OR Next 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Prev Data Port Rate appears when using the block or ACAMI channel allocation method or when a synchronous data port is assigned to another synchronous data port Designates the data rate for the port Available selections depend on the current base rate configured for the port The factory default for Nx64 is 384 kbps and Nx56 is 336 kbps NOTES This configuration option does not appear if the individual channel allocation method Chan is selected using the Assign By configuration option Changing this configuration option from one rate to another deallocates all DSO channels assigned to either the network interface or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface When you enable EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs 8 kbps of the to
92. screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select Call Control A F Rel icy X Bee amp 4 From the Call Setup screen select Pass Call Setup A Pass Dial ChDir A amp 5 From the Pass Directory screen press F1 Up to display the next higher numbered directory or press F2 Down to select the next lower numbered directory Pass XXxxxxxxx a lis Down Dial A 0 3d 6 When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen press Dial to place the call Pass n XXXXXXXXX es ts Down Dial A m Be 3 58 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Initiating a Call for PC ASCII Terminal Printer or SNMP Operation Use the Dial command to set up a semipermanent connection to route alarm messages to the specified destination The Dial command initiates a call through the integral modem to a printer ASCII terminal or PC p Procedure To initiate a call at the local DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select Call Control es ps Rel LED A 4 From the Call Setup screen select Dial This selection is not available if the DSU CSU s integral modem i
93. state February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Interface Group Input Counters objects ifEntry 10 to ifEntry 15 These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port the AUX port and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP management links For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP management link these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned if access is attempted The objects used to collect input statistics are listed below m iflnOctets ifEntry 10 m iflnUcastPkts ifEntry 11 iflnNUcastPkts ifEntry 12 m iflnDiscards ifEntry 13 m iflnErrors ifEntry 14 m iflnUnknownProtos ifEntry 15 Interface Group Output Counters objects ifEntry 16 to ifEntry 21 These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port the AUX port and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP management links For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP management link these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned if access is attempted The objects used to collect output statistics are listed below m ifOutOctets ifEntry 16 m ifOutUcastPkts ifEntry 17 m ifOutNUcastPkts ifEntry 18 m ifOutDiscards ifEntry 19 m ifOutErrors ifEntry 20 m ifOutQLen ifEntry 21 February 2001 E 9 E SNMP MIB Objects IP Group MIB II E 10 The IP Group objects are supported by the DSU
94. that collect performance data for the previous 8 hour period Port data is updated in 15 minute intervals After 15 minutes the current interval is rolled over into a set of accumulator registers that represent the previous 32 15 minute intervals for the register An interval total of how many of the 32 registers contain valid data is also kept as well as a 8 hour total for each accumulator register NOTE The following procedure is an example only Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the DSU CSU The procedures for displaying Telco and port registers are similar to this example 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 5 4 Maintenance p gt Procedure To display User Network Interface User performance 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat 2 From the Status screen select Perf Status A D STest Perf X eJ e Bo 3 Select User registers Performance A Telco User Prti a 4 From the User Registers screen press F1 to view current registers go to Step 5 press F2 to view 24 Hour Totals go to Step 6 or press F3 to view 15 Minute Interval Registers go to Step 7 E User Registers A E 24Tot A G9 1 L5 5 When you press F1 from the User Registers screen the User registers for the current 15 minute interval appear User Current Event xx xxx es ites 9 CJ
95. the DSU CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access in Chapter 3 Operation If the DSU CSU is misconfigured leaving it in a state that does not support async terminal operation the recovery procedure consists of power cycling the DSU CSU waiting for the completion of the power up self test and then pressing the async terminal s Return key five times in succession Begin pressing the Return key within two seconds after the completion of power up self test and do not wait longer than one second between each successive key press This procedure allows you to use the System Paused screen to reset the COM port configuration options or to reload all factory default configuration options 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 1 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Initiating an Asynchronous Terminal Session H 2 Once the appropriate configuration option changes have been made and access is established the Main Menu screen appears unless a password is required Figure H 1 Main Menu Screen shows the Main Menu screen for a standalone DSU CSU The carrier mounted DSU CSU shows the 3000 Series carrier slot number under the Customer ID The slot number field e g Slot 1 is changed to access specific DSU CSUs in the carrier For Telnet or SNMP access to the carrier specify the IP address of the applicable communication port see Appendix F P Network Addressing Scenarios NOTE By convention throughout this appendix examples of screens are shown
96. to the communication port Enab Allows dial in access to the DSU CSU Disab Prevents dial in access Incoming calls to the DSU CSU are not answered NOTE To enable Dial In for carrier mounted DSU CSUs the external device must be configured for automatic answer and the ComExtDev configuration option must be enabled C 18 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 2 of 10 Password None Next None Com Modem Both Prev Password Mode Activates a password prompt that prevents access until a password is entered None Does not require a password Com Prompts the communications port user to enter a password Modem Prompts the remote modem port user to enter a password This selection is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Both Prompts both the communications port user and the remote modem port user to enter a password This selection is available on standalone DSU CSUS only Com Port Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Setting the Carrier Communication Port Enables the use of the communication port in carrier mounted DSU CSUs Enab This communication port is enabled Disab The communication port is disabled NOTE This configuration option is available on carrierz mounted DSU CSUs only A Com Use ASCII Next Mgmt ASCII Daisy Term Prev Communication Port Use Specifies how the communication port i
97. verifies a device s operation by connecting the device s output to the device s input Loss of Signal The T1 line condition where there are no pulses Local Loopback branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Link Quality Reports The device that queries agents for management information or receives unsolicited messages traps indicating the occurrence of specific events The master timing source used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the DSU CSU Megabyte or megabytes A unit of memory measurement equal to approximately one million bytes typically 1 048 576 bytes February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Mbps menu tree MIB MIB II module MRU network network interface NMS node object SNMP OOF option PAP parity PBX PC PDU PDV Perf branch PLB PORT 1 4 interface POWER connector power on self test PPP PRBS 3160 A2 GB21 90 Glossary Megabits per second One megabit is 1 048 576 1 0242 bits The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top Level menu and extending down to various device functions Management Information Base A database of managed objects used by SNMP to provide network management information and device control MIB Release 2 The current Internet standard MIB defined by RFC 1213 A compact assembly functioning as a component in a larger system or unit Maximum Request Unit A configuration of data processing devices used for
98. you to clear the system contact Community Name 1 Specifies the first of two community names that are allowed to access this unit s Management Information Base MIB External SNMP managers must supply this name to access an object in the MIB Edit Allows you to edit or display the first community name Clear Allows you to clear the first community name February 2001 C 33 C Configuration Options C 34 Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 3 of 7 Access 1 Read Next Read R W Prev Access 1 Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 1 This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get to the accessible objects in the MIB for this device when community name 1 is used This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs R W Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set to the objects in the MIB for this device when community name 1 is used Write access is allowed for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either read only or read write CommunityName2 Next Edit Clear Prev Community Name 2 Specifies the second of two community names that are allowed to access this units Management Information Base MIB External SNMP managers must supply this name
99. 0 The far end equipment must support in band V 54 loopbacks Both Gives control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs to the DTE connected to this port All Ones Both Next Disab DTR RTS Both Prev Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready Specifies the conditions on the data port that determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE When this condition is detected all ones are sent to the network on the DSO channels allocated to the port Disab Disables the monitoring of interchange circuits from the DTE connected to this port DTR Monitors the DTE Ready interchange circuit CD CCITT 108 1 2 When DTR is interrupted all ones are sent to the network RTS Monitors the Request to Send interchange circuit CA CCITT 105 When RTS is interrupted all ones are sent to the network Both Monitors both DTR and RTS If either is interrupted all ones are sent to the network NOTE If the Port Type configuration option is set to X 21 set this configuration option to RTS or Disab February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 2 Port Configuration Options 3 of 5 Rev Yellow Halt Next None Halt Prev Action on Network Yellow Alarm Specifies the action taken on this port when a Yellow Alarm is received on the network interface None Makes the data port unaffected by Yellow Alarms received on the network interface Halt Stops the transmission of data on the port and
100. 00 000 000 000 NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Alt Mdm NetMask Next Edit Clear Prev Alternate Subnet Mask for the Modem Port Specifies the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt This Subnet Mask is needed if a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm trap phone number contained in the alarm directory and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another phone number If this configuration option contains a non zero Subnet Mask it is used as the Subnet Mask for the modem port if a call is completed to the alternate phone number Edit Allows you to edit and or display the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port Clear Allows you to clear the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port The Subnet Mask is set to 000 000 000 000 If the Subnet Mask is 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 6 of 7 Modem Link PPP Next PPP SLIP Prev Modem Port Link Layer Protocol Specifies the link layer protocol for the modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgm
101. 01 4 13 4 Maintenance Troubleshooting The DSU CSU is designed to provide you with trouble free service However Table 4 6 Troubleshooting gives you some direction if a problem occurs For problems other than those listed in the table please contact your service representative Table 4 6 Troubleshooting 1 of 3 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power 1 The power module is not securely attached 2 The wall receptacle has no power 1 Check the power module attachment 2 Check the wall receptacle power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Power Up Self Test fails The DSU CSU has detected an internal hardware failure Contact your service representative Message LOS at NET appears 1 Network cable problem 2 No signal is being transmitted at the far end 3 Facility problem 1 Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the far end status 3 Contact your facility provider Message LOS at DTE appears 1 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable problem 2 No signal being transmitted from the DTE 1 Check that the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the DTE status Message OOF at Net appears 1 Incompatible framing format between the network and the DSU CSU 2 Network cabling problem 3 Facility problem 1 Check that the framing format
102. 1 All to choose to copy to all ports Copy To A Prti E x tl jtej le Configuring the DSU CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access To configure the DSU CSU for SNMP or Telnet access m Enable the SNMP agent or Telnet server within the DSU CSU see Appendix C Configuration Options m Select and configure the port that provides the link to the SNMP or Telnet system m Set the Internet Protocol IP address and subnet mask needed to access the DSU CSU see Appendix F P Network Addressing Scenarios m Select the link layer protocol PPP or SLIP for the port that provides the link to the SNMP or Telnet system m For SNMP links specify the two community names and their access levels that are allowed to access the device s Management Information Base MIB m For SNMP links configure the device to send traps to the SNMP manager if desired m Specify the Telnet password or SNMP validation options if desired see Appendix C Configuration Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 19 3 Operation Selecting the Port 3 20 The SNMP manager Telnet device or network device e g a router can be directly connected to the communications COM port An external LAN Adapter can be connected to either the COM port or the auxiliary AUX port to provide Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity Also the DSU CSU can be daisy chained together by connecting the COM port of one device to th
103. 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 19 4 Maintenance Sending a Line Loopback Up or Down p gt Procedure To send a Line Loopback Up or Down sequence on the network to a far end DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Rlpbk Test 2 Ripbk X Lpbk i 2 ls 5 3 From the Rem Loopback screen press F1 to select LLBUP Line Loopback Up or press F2 to select LLBDN Line Loopback Down Rem Loopback A LLBDN tel X zm 6 e C The Line Loopback sequence is sent up or downstream to the far end DSU CSU for 10 seconds During this time Sending appears on Line 2 of the LCD followed by Command Complete when 10 seconds have elapsed You can press any function key to restore the Rem Loopback screen without affecting transmission of the loopback code 4 20 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Sending a V 54 ANSI FT1 Activation Deactivation p gt Procedure To send a V 54 or ANSI FT1 Activation or Deactivation loopback sequence to the far end DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Rlpbk Test 2 Ripbk Lpbk i 2 8 3 From the Rem Loopback screen press the function key that corresponds to the specific loopback test you want to perform Use the scroll keys if necessary Rem Loopbac
104. 4 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672 If Assign By ACAMI Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select One Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 If Assign By Chan 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select Multiple Assign To NET DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Assign By Block ACAMI Chan Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Nx56 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 If Assign By Block 672 728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Start At Time Slot Nx or Dx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Port 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select One Port Rate Nx64 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 Nx56 56
105. 4 4 19 2 38 4 Char Length 7 8 CParity None Even Odd CStop Bits 1 1 5 2 Ignore DTR Yes No CmlinActTm Enab Disab CmDiscTm 1 60 Default 5 Modem Use Mgmt ASCII Term Modem Type Async Sync Modem Rate 1 2 2 4 MChar Len e 7 8 MParity e None Even Odd MStop Bits e 1 2 LSpaceDisc e Enab Disab 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 43 C Configuration Options 44 User Options Value Default in Bold MolnActTm e Enab Disab MoDiscTm e 1 60 Default 5 Aux Use None Mgmt Daisy Aux Rate 9 6 14 4 19 2 38 4 TnSession Enab Disab TnPaswd Enab Disab TninActTm Enab Disab TnDiscTm 1 60 Default 5 Alarm Options Value Default in Bold Alrm Msg Disab Modem Com Both SNMP Trap Enab Disab Trap Disc Enab Disab DialOut Enab Disab Call Retry Enab Disab Dial Delay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AltDialDir None 1 2 3 4 5 Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Alrm Relay A Enab Disab NOTE A circular symbol identifies configuration options that are available on standalone DSU CSUS only A triangular symbol A identifies configuration options that are available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 Prt1 Options Value Default in Bold
106. 4 9 Shared Diagnostic Control Panel SDCP acquiring releasing the user interface 3 51 physical description 3 1 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent 1 3 configuration options examples of use 3 19 3 26 option table C 32 option worksheet C 52 connection examples 2 3 2 8 F 1 database 1 3 IP addressing F 1 manager 1 3 MIBs functional description E 1 list of objects E 1 procedure for configuring access 3 24 objects 1 3 principles of operation 1 3 SNMP Down message 4 4 4 15 traps functional description 1 3 4 12 procedure for configuring 3 26 specifications environmental B 1 Stat Status branch examples of use 3 9 3 13 4 1 4 3 4 6 4 37 status messages See messages status STest Self Test Health branch example of use 4 1 StEvnt Status Event report 4 10 straps See configuration options subnet 3 19 C 35 C 37 F 2 synchronous data port E 1 February 2001 IN 5 Index T T1 line D network connection D technical specifications B 1 Test branch example of use 4 19 test commands 4 19 front panel LED indications 3 6 lamp test 4 35 local loopback 4 22 abort 4 29 data channel loopback DCLB 4 27 data terminal loopback DTLB 4 28 DTE loopback DLB 4 25 line loopback LLB 4 23 payload loopback PLB 4 24 repeater loopback RLB 4 26 remote loopback 4 19 test messages 4 37 test patterns 4 30 test jacks functional description 4 17 physical description 1 3 3
107. A process that transfers device firmware and software from a locally attached PC toa device or allows the duplication of firmware and software from a local device to a remote device A device that is connected farther from the host computer An interconnection point for terminals multiplexers and transmission facilities Individual channels may be inserted into the aggregate stream or dropped out to accommodate specific applications Data Set Ready A signal from the modem to the DTE that indicates the modem is turned ON and connected to the Data Service Unit Data communications equipment that provides timing signal regeneration and an interface to data terminal equipment A subrate DSU CSU is normally referred to as a DSU Digital Signal Cross Connect level 1 An interconnection point for terminals multiplexers and transmission facilities Digital Signal Level 0 A 64 kbps standard signal or channel Assigning specific DSO channels in the DSU CSU to specific interfaces network DTE Drop Insert etc Digital Signal level 1 A signal of 1 544 Mbps in North America Defines objects for managing the network and DTE Drop Insert interfaces on the DSU CSU Data Terminal Equipment The equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals for transmission The Drop Insert DSX 1 interface on the rear panel of the DSU CSU Data Terminal Loopback Loopback mode that loops the data for
108. ACCULINK DSU CSU Models 3160 A3 3161 B3 3164 A2 and 3165 A2 Operator s Guide Document No 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 ANADIA S Copyright 2001 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Standalone FCC Registration number See label on unit Ringer Equivalence number REN See label on unit Canadian Certification number See label on unit Canadian DOC Load number See label on unit Carrier Card FCC Registrat
109. B mS X 1 7 e 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 27 4 Maintenance 5 From the DCLB screen press the Function key for the port for which you want to perform the data channel loopback Use the scroll keys if necessary Loopback DCLB A Prti Prt2 Prt3 x m el be Test Started appears on Line 2 If a Data Channel loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations Starting a Data Terminal Loopback The Data Terminal Loopback command DTLB loops the data received from the selected port for all DSO channels allocated to the port back out of the port This loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but before it reaches the T1 framer DTE NETWORK DSX 1 INTERFACE DTLB DTLB PORT 2 PORT 1 496 14314 02 gt Procedure To perform a Data Terminal loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk id x 1 amp 3 From the Loopback screen press the gt key until the DTLB selection appears on the screen 4 28 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance 4 Select DTLB Loopback 2 i X J e Bo 5 From th
110. Btu per hour at 100 Vac includes external transformer 9 2 watts 31 4 Btu per hour at 120 Vac includes external transformer 3164 3165 12 0 watts 41 Btu per hour at 24 and 48 Vdc 16 0 watts 55 0 Btu per hour at 115 Vac includes external transformer ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Shock and Vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 95 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling February 2001 B 1 B Technical Specifications B 2 Table B 1 Models 3160 3164 3165 DSU CSU s Technical Specifications Specifications Criteria PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS Height Model 3160 or 3165 DSU CSU 2 13 inches 5 4 cm Model 3164 DSU CSU 3 90 inches 10 0 cm Width 7 63 inches 19 4 cm Depth 12 13 inches 30 8 cm WEIGHT Model 3160 DSU CSU 2 6 pounds 1 2 kg Model 3164 DSU CSU 3 6 pounds 1 7 kg Model 3165 DSU CSU 2 4 pounds 1 1 kg DTE DROP INSERT DSX 1 INTERFACE Models 3160 3164 Physical Interface Framing Format Coding Format DTE Line Equalization Send AIS DB15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 to 196 5 meters Selectable NETWORK T1 INTERFACE Physical Interface USA RJ48C Physical Interface Canada CA81A using adapter cable Framing Format D4 ESF Coding Format AMI B8ZS Line Build Out LBO 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5
111. DCLB release sequences for this port V 54 Enables DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with the V 54 standard for Inter DCE signaling for point to point circuits FT1 Enables DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with the ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard for In band signaling for fractional T1 FT1 channel loopbacks Both Enables DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI or V 54 standard The type of actuate and release sequences do not have to match Port LB Disab Factory 1 Both Factory 2 Next Disab DTLB DCLB Both Prev Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Allows the initiation and termination of a local Data Terminal Loopback DTLB or remote Data Channel Loopback DCLB by the DTE connected to this port DTLB is equivalent to a V 54 loop 3 and DCLB is equivalent to a V 54 loop 2 Control of these loopbacks is through the DTE interchange circuits as specified by the V 54 standard Disab Disables control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs by the DTE connected to this port DTLB Gives control of the local DTLBs for this port to the attached to this port This loopback is controlled by the Local Loopback interchange circuit LL CCITT 141 DCLB Gives control of the remote DCLBs for the far end port connected to this port to the DTE attached to this port This loopback is controlled by the Remote Loopback interchange circuit RL CCITT 14
112. DSO channels to allocate to the data port The data port rate is automatically determined based on the number of channels selected Once a port is selected you have access to the configuration options to complete the port allocation procedure These configuration options enable you to Assign the selected port to the desired interface Select the desired method for channel allocation Select the port rate and starting channel if the allocation method is block or ACAMI Select the specific channels if the allocation method is by individual channel February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation p Procedure To select the data port 1 2 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Select Edit From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Chan selection appears on the screen Select Chan Edit DTE A Port NET Chan 2 le From the Channel Config screen press the gt key to scroll the ports onto the Screen Select the desired port by pressing its corresponding Function key Channel Config A Es Pri2 i a e gt The configuration option for the data port channel allocation destination appears on the screen Select NET to assign this port to
113. DSU CSU General Information Guide Document No 3100 A2 GK40 Chapter 3 Operation Provides instructions for using the front panel changing configuration options establishing security and using the internal modem Chapter 4 Maintenance Contains procedures for monitoring testing and troubleshooting Appendix A Front Panel Menu Contains a menu tree showing all the main front panel functions Appendix B Technical Specifications Contains technical specifications for the 316x DSU CSUs Appendix C Configuration Options Contains all the configuration options and default settings Appendix D Pin Assignments Shows the pin assignments for connectors and cables Appendix E SNMP MIB Objects Describes the MIB objects supported by the DSU CSUs 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 vii About This Guide Section Description Appendix F P Network Addressing Scenarios Provides sample IP addressing schemes Appendix G Front Panel Emulation Explains how to use front panel emulation software in lieu of the front panel Appendix H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Explains how to use a VT100 compatible terminal to configure and control the unit Appendix Equipment List Contains order numbers for cables and other related parts Glossary Defines abbreviations and terms used in this document Index Lists key terms concepts
114. E Drop Insert DSX 1 interface DSO channel n where nis a number from 1 to 24 You can modify this value on this screen Assign DTE channels to network channels by pressing the Function key below the network channel desired The DTE channel number scrolls up one number each time you press the Function key Only unassigned DTE channels appear during scrolling Di D2 D4 D5 D6 D7 DI D10 Dii D12 D13 D24 RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS Specify DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Voice Channels Specifies which DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface are voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit Signaling information to the network interface Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Line 2 displays whether the DSO channel indicated in Line 1 is a voice or data channel Possible values for Line 2 are Value Meaning RBS This DSO channel is a voice channel carrying RBS information When this DSO channel is assigned to a network DSO channel RBS information is preserved across the connection Data This DSO channel is a data channel that does not contain RBS information Signaling is not preserved across the connection Press the Function key below the desired channel to toggle between RBS and Data 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 11 C Configuration Options Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options 1 of 4 Channel Config Dsply Clea
115. EIA 530 A to RS 449 Cable Interface D 9 m EIA 530 A to V 35 Cable Interface D 11 m EIA 530 A to X 21 Cable Interface D 13 m Serial Crossover Cable D 14 m Power Input Connector D 15 m Optional DC Power Cable D 15 m External Clock D 16 iv February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Contents E SNMP MIB Objects _ 5 PPM Pc 1 1213 2 System Group E 3 Interface Group MIB Il 1 ee eee E 4 IP Group eee KRI E 10 ICMP Group MIB Ies eee E 13 TCP Group MIB Il 2 eens E 13 UDP Group Il ees 13 Transmission Group E 13 SNMP Group MIB secca aG 14 m 051 1 RFC 1406 E 14 Near End Group DS1 E1 E 14 Far End Group DS1 E1 E 18 051 Fractional Group DS1 E1 E 19 m RS 232 like RFC 1317 E 19 General Port Table RS 232 like MIB E 20 Async
116. ET EQPT hn in hn OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV cule ode ou O O O fs 21 NETWORK DTR RXD CTS RTS 496 14936 Figure 1 1 3160 DSU CSU Front Panel LCD ACCULINK NET 9 ii in OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV Out Out Out 2 NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS 496 14937 Figure 1 2 3164 DSU CSU Front Panel 1 4 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 ACCULINK 1 Introduction LCD OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS NETWORK PORT 495 14567 01 Figure 1 3 3165 DSU CSU Front Panel Standalone DSU CSU Rear Panel The standalone DSU CSU rear panel contains the connectors required for the operation of the DSU CSU Figure 1 4 3160 DSU CSU Rear Panel Figure 1 5 3164 DSU CSU Rear Panel and Figure 1 6 3165 DSU CSU Rear Panel The connectors and their functions are listed in Table 1 1 Standalone DSU CSU Rear Panel Connectors 3160 A2 GB21 90 PORT 2 EXT CLK PORT 1 COM MODEM DSX 1 NET 99 16234 Figure 1 4 3160 DSU CSU Rear Panel February 2001 1 5 1 Introduction 0
117. Edit A NET Chan m 1 6 Press F1 Next to display the next configuration option Clock Src 7 Select the master clock source For network press F2 note that network is also the default Clock Src NET E A Next NET DTE 2 Be amp Configuring for External Timing p Procedure To configure 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS for external timing 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt gt key until the Gen selection appears on the Screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 47 3 Operation Select Gen Edit A Gen x J le Press F1 Next to display the next configuration option Clock Src Select the master clock source For external press the gt key until the Ext selection appears on the screen Select Ext external timing Clock Src Ext A E Int EH A 1 1127 8 Select the appropriate external clock rate by pressing the corresponding Function key This step is mandatory if you have chosen external clocking Clock Rate 1544 pu A E 2048 1544 X m Establishing Access Security on a Port 3 48 Although the password fe
118. H 4 m Using Asynchronous Terminal H 5 m Setting Customer Identification H 7 m Displaying LED lt H 8 m Changing Configuration Options H 9 Displaying or Editing Configuration Options H 9 Saving Edit H 11 m Establishing Access Security ona H 12 m Setting a Password H 13 m Entering a Password to Gain H 14 m Configuration Worksheets for the Asynchronous Terminal Interface 15 I Equipment List Glossary Index vi February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 About This Guide Document Purpose and Intended Audience This operator s guide contains installation operation and maintenance information for the ACCULINK 3160 3161 3164 or 3165 Data Service Unit DSU Channel Service Unit CSU It is designed for installers and users of DSU CSUs familiar with the operation of digital data communication equipment Document Summary Section Description Chapter 1 Introduction Describes the 316x DSU CSUs and their features Chapter 2 Installation Describes how to install the standalone units and make connections Instructions for the carrier mounted 3161 DSU CSU are contained in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161
119. Hz 1544 Sets the input rate of the external clock to 1 544 kHz 8 Sets the input rate of the external clock to 8 kHz NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs External clock rate 2 048 kHz does not imply E1 compatibility Tst Timeout Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Test Timeout Specifies whether user initiated loopback and pattern tests have durations that are specified by the Tst Duration configuration option Enab Loopback and pattern tests initiated on the DSU CSU have specified durations Disab Disables test timeout The tests are terminated manually NOTE For DSU CSUs that are remotely managed through an inband data stream such as EDL or FDL the recommended setting is Enab If tests are inadvertently left in the active state the Enab setting will allow the test to timeout terminate after a specified time Tst Duration 10 Next Up Down Save Prev Test Duration Specifies the duration 1 to 120 minutes of user initiated loopback and pattern tests The Tst Timeout configuration option must be set to Enab Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change Use the Function keys Up or Down to increment or decrement the digit Up Increments the test duration Down Decrements the test duration Save Stores the test duration February 2001 C 17 C Configuration Options User Interface Configura
120. IN 2 February 2001 D daisy chaining configuration options C 19 C 26 connectivity 1 7 2 3 2 4 data channel loopback DCLB 4 27 C 4 data port See PORT 1 4 interface data terminal loopback DTLB 4 28 C 4 database SNMP 1 3 dc power option 2 5 B 1 D 15 default configuration options C 2 DevFail Device Failure message 4 4 DevHS Device Health and Status branch example of use 4 3 dimensions B 2 DL Download branch operation 3 65 DSO channel allocation 3 29 DTE Configuration branch option table C 2 option worksheet C 42 DTE Drop Insert interface channel allocation procedure 3 29 configuration options C 2 failure message 4 2 functional description 1 2 1 7 2 1 managed by SNMP E 1 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 3 technical specifications B 2 troubleshooting 4 14 DTE loopback DLB 4 25 configuration option C 3 external control interface D 3 E EER Excessive Error Rate condition ASCII terminal printer message 4 11 Device Health and Status message 4 4 front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 Performance Report message 4 10 troubleshooting 4 15 EIA 530A interface D 8 Embedded Data Link EDL configuration option C 6 C 7 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 2 4 F 1 enterprise specific trap 4 12 environmental specifications B 1 equalization line C 2 error messages See messages alarm ES Errored Seconds report 4 9 external modem interface D 14 3160 A2 GB21 90
121. MP session requests Enab The DSU CSU responds to SNMP session requests Disab The DSU CSU does not respond to SNMP session requests NMS Valid Disab Next Enab Disab Prev NMS IP Validation Specifies whether the DSU CSU validates for security reasons the IP address of an SNMP manager attempting to access the DSU CSU Allowable addresses are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration option Enab The DSU CSU validates the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the DSU CSU Disab The DSU CSU does not validate the IP address of SNMP management systems Num Sec Mgrs 1 Next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Prev Number of Security Managers Specifies the number of SNMP managers that are allowed to access the DSU CSU NOTE You must configure an IP address for each SNMP manager that is allowed access to the DSU CSU Allowable addresses are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration option NMS n IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev NMS Manager n IP Address Specifies the allowable IP address of an SNMP manager attempting to access the DSU CSU The manager number n is specified by the Num Sec Mgrs configuration option Edit Allows you to edit and or display the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager Clear Allows you to clear the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 C 32 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configurati
122. Name 1 CommunityName1 Text Field Clear Name 1 Access Access 1 Read R W Community Name 2 CommunityName2 Text Field Clear Name 2 Access Access 2 Read R W Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold NMS IP Validation NMS Valid Enable Disable Number of Managers Num Sec Mgrs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NMS n IP Address NMS n IP Adr Text Field Clear Access Level NMS n Access Read R w Management and Communication SNMP Trap Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold SNMP Traps SNMP Trap Enable Disable Number of Trap Managers Num Trap Mgrs 1 2 3 4 5 6 Trap n IP Address Trapn IP Adr Text Field Clear Trap Manager n Destination Trapn Dst None Com Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 General Traps Gen Trap Disable Warm AuthFail Both Enterprise Specific Traps Entp Trap Enable Disable Link Traps Link Trap Disable Up Down Both Link Trap Interfaces Trap I F Network DTE T1s Ports All 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 23 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation H 24 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Equipment List 3160 A2 GB21 90 Equipment Feature Number Model 3160 DSU CSU 3160 A3 210 Model 3164 DSU CSU 3164 A2 210 Model 3165 DSU CSU 3165 A2 210 T1 Line Interface Cabl
123. Number DCE Transmit Clock From DSU CSU 1 DCE Receive Data From DSU CSU 2 Signal Ground 3 DCE Transmit Data To DSU CSU 4 DCE Data Terminal Ready To DSU CSU 5 DCE Carrier Detect From DSU CSU 6 DCE Request to Send To DSU CSU 7 DCE Receive Clock From DSU CSU 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments 8 POSITION MODULAR PLUG KEYED DB9 NO CONNECTION SOCKET RX DATA RX DATA GROUND TX DATA DTR CD GROUND TX DATA DTR CD NO CONNECTION 494 14153 02 Figure D 5 COM Port to PC Cable 8 POSITION MODULAR PLUG KEYED RX DATA GROUND TX DATA DTR CD 3160 A2 GB21 90 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable February 2001 RX DATA GROUND TX DATA DTR CD 494 14154 02 D 7 D Pin Assignments EIA 530 A Port Interface Connector The EIA 530 A Port interface connector information is shown in Table D 7 EIA 530 A Port Interface Connector Table D 7 EIA 530 A Port Interface Connector Circuit Signal Mnemonic ITU T Number Direction Pin Shield 1 Signal Common AB 102A 7 Signal Common AC 102B 23 Transmitted Data BA 103 To DSU CSU 2 A 14 B Received Data BB 104 From DSU CSU 3 A 16 B Request to Send CA 105 To DSU CSU 4 A 19 B Clear to Send CB 106 From DSU CSU 5 13 B Received Line CF 109 From DSU CSU
124. P 496 15006 01 Figure 2 4 Direct Connection DSU CSU LAN ETHERNET ROUTER PPP SLIP 496 15007 01 Figure 2 5 Connection through a Router 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 2 3 2 Installation LAN ETHERNET ROUTER DSU CSU 496 15008 01 Figure 2 6 Connection through a LAN Adapter DSU CSU LAN ETHERNET ROUTER PPP 496 15009 01 LAN ADAPTER Figure 2 7 LAN Adapter and Daisy Chaining LAN ROUTER DSU CSU DSU CSU ETHERNET LAN ADAPTER Figure 2 8 Remote Access through FDL EDL 496 15010 01 2 4 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 2 Installation Important Instructions Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the DSU CSU or included in this guide For a complete listing of the safety instructions see mportant Safety Instructions at the beginning of this guide A HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES This product is designed to protect sensitive components from damage due to electrostatic discharge ESD during normal operation When performing installation procedures however take proper static control precautions to prevent damage to equipment If you are not sure of the proper static control precautions contact your nearest sales or service representative Optional Power Sources The DSU CSU is typically powered by the ac power module Use the following procedures only if you want to use an opt
125. PPP the IP address can be negotiated if the network device e g router or SNMP manager supports such negotiation The IP address is composed of four fields with three digits per field ooo xxx xxx xxx The IP address is set for the MODEM port the COM port or the AUX port with LAN Adapter or daisy chain depending on which one has been chosen as the SNMP or Telnet communication link The example below assumes that an IP address of 010 155 111 222 is being set for the COM port You can use the same principles to assign any value between 000 and 255 for each digit field to other ports gt Procedure To assign an IP address to the COM port 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Mgmt selection appears on the screen 5 Select Mgmt Edit a User Alarm Zx 1 7 ME CJ 6 From the Mgmt Config screen select Gen Mgmt Config A Gen Trap A Bele amp 7 Press F1 Next until the Com IP Adr configuration option appears NOTE Steps 8 and 9 describe the process for entering an IP address This process applies to any IP address February 2001 3 21 3 Operation 8 Press F2 Edit to edit the IP address You have the option of usin
126. QUIPMENT DTE 4 18 EQPT NET Out Mon Jack EQPT MON In Mon Jack NET Network In Selectable LINE INTERNAL LINE RECEIVER CIRCUITRY NETWORK Selectable Mon Jack EQPT Mon Jack NET EQPT NET MON Out In Out 496 14875 Figure 4 2 Test Jack Block Diagram Table 4 7 Test Jack Functions Test Jack Name Function NET In A break in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward the network by external test equipment NET Out A break in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the Network Out network and allows it to be terminated by the external test equipment EQPT In A break in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward Equipment In the terminal equipment DTE by external test equipment EQPT Out A break in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the Equipment Out terminal equipment DTE and allows it to be terminated by the external test equipment MON In A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon Monitor branch of Monitor In the menu tree If it is set to EQPT the default this jack monitors the signal going into the terminal equipment DTE If it is set to NET this jack monitors the signal going into the network MON Out A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon Monitor branch of Monitor Out the menu tree If it is set to EQPT the default this jack monitors the signal coming from the terminal equ
127. Repeater loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk Ptrns x 1 3 From the Loopback screen press the gt key until the RLB selection appears on the screen 4 Select RLB Loopback A PLB DLB Test Started appears on Line 2 If a Repeater loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations 4 26 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Starting a Data Channel Loopback The Data Channel Loopback command DCLB loops the data received from the network interface for all DSO channels allocated to the selected port back to the network The loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but before it is sent out the data port DTE NETWORK DSX 1 INTERFACE DCLB A DCLB A ALL 15 ALL1s Y PORT2 PORT 496 14315 02 p Procedure To perform a Data Channel loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Eee Lpbk 7 8 H 3 From the Loopback screen press the gt gt key until the selection appears on the screen 4 Select DCLB Loopback A DLB RL
128. SU CSU supports the following MIBs m MIB II RFC 1213 Defines the general objects for use in Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP internets and provides general information about the DSU CSU m DS1 E1 RFC 1406 Defines objects for managing DS1 interfaces and supports the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces on the DSU CSU m RS 232 like MIB RFC 1317 Defines objects for managing RS 232 type interfaces and supports synchronous data ports PORTs 1 4 and management communication ports AUX MODEM and COM ports on the DSU CSU m Generic Interface MIB Extensions RFC 1229 An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic interfaces in MIB II It supports control of tests on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 and synchronous data interfaces that are not supported by other MIBs m Enterprise MIB Defines objects that are unique to devices such as Model 316x DSU CSUs 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 1 E SNMP MIB Objects MIB II RFC 1213 The objects defined by MIB II are organized into 10 different groups The DSU CSU implements only those groups where the semantics of the group are applicable to the implementation of a DSU CSU The MIB II object groups supported or not supported by the 3100 Series devices are as follows System Group Interface Group Address Translation Group IP Group ICMP Group TCP Group UDP Group EGP Group Transmission Group
129. Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects Modem Use ASCII Next Mgmt ASCII Term Prev Modem Port Use Specifies how the modem port is used Mgmt Configures the modem port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system ASCII Configures the modem port as a proprietary ASCII port This selection supports dial out ASCII alarm messages and dial in dial out front panel access Term Configures the modem port as the interface to an async terminal NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 8 of 10 Modem Type Specifies whether the port uses synchronous or asynchronous communication if the modem port is configured as the SNMP management link NOTES This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only This confBiguration option is not available if the Modem Use configuration option is set to ASCII In this case the modem port is always asynchronous Modem Port Rate Configures the bit rate for the modem port 1 2 Sets the bit rate at 1200 bps 2 4 Sets the bit rate at 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Modem Character Length Configures the character length number of data bits for the modem port This does not include the start bit always 1 or the stop bits 8 is t
130. T1 network applications Figure 2 3 Fractional T1 Application Example 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 2 1 2 Installation DSU CSU LAN DSU CSU ROUTER ROUTER 496 15003 01 Figure 2 1 Point to Point Application Example NETWORK SERVICES DSU CSU LAN ROUTER 496 15004 01 Figure 2 2 Shared Access Application Example LAN ROUTER DSU CSU FRACTIONAL NETWORK DSU CSU LAN LAN DSU CSU ROUTER ROUTER 496 15005 01 Figure 2 3 Fractional T1 Application Example 2 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 2 Installation SNMP or Telnet Connection Examples The DSU CSU can be connected to an SNMP or Telnet system in a number of ways Some examples include Directly connecting the COM port to the SNMP or Telnet device Figure 2 4 Direct Connection Connecting the COM port to a network device e g a router Figure 2 5 Connection through a Router Connecting the COM port or the AUX port to an external LAN Adapter for Ethernet connectivity Figure 2 6 Connection through a LAN Adapter Daisy chaining the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other Figure 2 7 LAN Adapter and Daisy Chaining Remotely accessing the DSU CSU through the Facility Data Link FDL or the synchronous data port s Embedded Data Link EDL Figure 2 8 Remote Access through FDL EDL NOTE EDL is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs LAN ROUTER ETHERNET DSU CSU PPP SLI
131. TE interface MIB objects unique to a specific company s devices A trap unique to a specific company s devices End of Number A discrepancy between a measured or computed value or condition and the true or specified value or condition Errored Seconds A second with one or more ESF error events one or more CRC6 error events or OOFs ElectroStatic Discharge An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage equipment and degrade electrical circuitry Extended SuperFrame The T1 transmission standard that specifies 24 frames as an extended superframe to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits Factory 1 configuration area The first of two configuration option sets that are preset at the factory read only options Factory 2 configuration area The second of two configuration option sets that are preset at the factory read only options An uncorrected hardware error An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail to perform its required function Federal Communications Commission The Board of Commissioners that regulates all electrical communications that originate in the United States Facility Data Link The selected framing bits in the ESF format used in a wide area link that are used for control monitoring and testing Individual DSO channels that may be sold separately or in groups to provide bandwidth that is some fraction of the total E1 capability One i
132. Terminal Interface 3160 A2 GB21 90 This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring your DSU CSU using the async terminal interface In the tables default settings for Default Factory 1 are indicated by bold type It is recommended that you copy these blank worksheets before using them Network Interface Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Line Framing Format NET Framing D4 ESF Line Coding Format NET Coding AMI B8ZS Line Build Out LBO LBO 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Management Link Mgmt Link Enable Disable Bit Stuffing BitStuff 62411 Part68 Disable Network Initiated LLB NET LLB Enable Disable Network Initiated PLB NET PLB Enable Disable ANSI Performance Report ANSI PRM Enable Disable Messages Circuit Identifier Circuit Ident Text Field Clear DTE Interface Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Interface Status DTE Port Enable Disable Line Framing Format DTE Framing D4 ESF Line Coding Format DTE Coding AMI B8ZS Line Equalization Equal 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 DTE LB on External Extrn DLB Enable Disable Contact Send All Ones on DTE Send Ones Enable Disable Failure February 2001 H 15 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation H 16 Sync Data Port Options Port 1 Front Panel Equivale
133. The DS1 Interval Table Objects dsx1IntervalEniry The following DS1 interval table objects are provided for the network interface only Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error status if access is attempted m dsx1Intervallndex The index that identifies the T1 interface m dsx1IntervalNumber The interval number 1 to 96 m dsx1ilIntervalESs Errored Seconds for the interval m dsx1Interval SESs Severely Errored Seconds for the interval m dsxilntervalUASs Unavailable Seconds for the interval m dsx1IntervalCSSs Controlled Slip Seconds for the interval m dsx1Interval BESs Bursty Errored Seconds for the interval Near End Group The DS1 Total Table Objects dsx1TotalEntry The following DS1 total table objects are provided for the network interface only Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error status if access is attempted m dsx1 Totallndex The index that identifies the T1 interface m dsx1TotalESs The 24 hour total Errored Seconds m dsx1Total SESs The 24 hour total Severely Errored Seconds m dsx1TotalUASs The 24 hour total Unavailable Seconds m dsx1TotalCSSs The 24 hour total Controlled Slip Seconds m dsx1TotalBESs The 24 hour total Bursty Errored Seconds Far End Group DS1 E1 MIB E 18 The DS1 Far End Group consists of the following three tables m 051 Far End Current m 051 Far End Int
134. The Facility Interface Code 02LS2 along with the RJ11C jack should be specified to the telephone company when ordering a dial line for the modem The 3161 DSU CSU connects to the T1 network using the multi line USOC type RJ48H jack and does not have a PSTN interface 316x DSU CSU Facility Interface Codes Code Description 04DU9 BN 1 544 Mbps superframe format SF without line power 04DU9 DN 1 544 Mbps SF and B8ZS without line power 04DU9 1KN 1 544 Mbps ANSI ESF without line power 04DU 1SN 1 544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power 3 The ringer equivalence number REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENS for the calling area 4 f the 316x DSU CSU causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary 5 The telepho
135. ace DSO channel n where n can be any number from 1 through 24 p Procedure To display the DSO channel allocation 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Chan selection appears the screen 5 Select Chan Edit A Chan x w J a 3 36 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 6 From the Channel Config screen select Dsply Channel Config a Dsply Clear DTE x evil amp 7 From the Display Chan screen select NET to display the channels allocated to the network interface Or select DTE to display the channels allocated to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Display Chan es DTE A 5 e 8 8 If you selected NET the channels allocated to the network interface are displayed Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface while Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel shown in Line 1 Pressing the lt or gt gt key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three If you selected DTE the channels allocated to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface are displayed Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE Drop Insert
136. and then A 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX A Edit A pee 6 Press F3 Edit to change the displayed directory s phone number phone numbers can be up to 40 characters If you select Edit the Edit screen appears 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX A Next Prev Edit A EJ e 3 7 Use the lt gt keys to position the cursor under the digit s you want to change Press F1 to scroll up to a higher digit Press F2 to scroll down to a lower digit The gt key inserts blanks default characters while the gt key invokes the End Of Number EON character which terminates the dial string and erases any characters to the right when you use the Save function See Table 3 6 Valid Phone Number Characters for the set of valid characters and rules that apply to entering phone numbers Example P9W8135551212 8 Press F3 Save to store your changes in nonvolatile memory If you press or A before saving the phone number you just changed the previous phone number remains in effect 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX A Up Down Save x EJ ej 3 56 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Table 3 6 Valid Phone Number Characters Valid Characters Meaning Restrictions 0to9 DTMF or pulse digits DTMF digits P Selects Pulse dialing Pulse or Tone must be specified otherwise Tone is the default This must be
137. aracters numbers for the customer ID Valid characters are 0 through 9 A to Z and blank space Press F3 Save to save the ID February 2001 3 11 3 Operation Selecting the DTE Drop Insert or Data Port for LED Display Use the LED command on the Control branch to select which port s DTE Drop Insert or data port status appears on the five shared LEDs on the front panel p Procedure To select a port for LED display 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select LED Control A Call Rel LED x 3 1 e MM The currently selected port name appears on the top line of the LCD DTE indicates the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port LED Dsply DTE A DTE Prti Prt2 E EEA E 4 From the LED Dsply screen press the Function key that corresponds to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 or data port for which you want the LEDs to display Use the scroll keys if necessary Select DTE to monitor the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port s SIG OOF ALRM PDV and BPV status signals on the shared LEDs Select a particular data port to monitor the data port s DTR TXD RXD CTS and RTS control signals on the shared LEDs 3 12 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Displaying LED Conditions The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monit
138. arrier mounted DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the User selection appears on the screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 61 3 Operation 5 Select User Edit a Chan Gen User EJ e 6 Press F1 Next until the Com Port configuration option appears 7 Select Enab to enable the COM port for the carrier mounted DSU CSU Com Port A m Enab ee See The carrier COM port provides the following functionality m f configured for ASCII only one ASCII device may be used for the carrier If two COM ports are configured for ASCII neither will work m f configured for Mgmt each device the carrier can support an Mgmt COM port however each Mgmt COM port must be connected to a different subnet To facilitate IP data routing the device with the closest link to the SNMP manager or Telnet client should be configured as the IP Bus Master m f configured for either ASCII or Mgmt the carrier COM port may be configured to control an external device e g modem x 25 PAD through the use of AT or user specified commands The set of valid characters for control of the carrier external COM port device is as follows m The nu
139. ary between models and are listed below The values of rs232Portlndex for the 3160 DSU CSU are m 1 port m 2 port m 3 Auxiliary RS 232 port m 4 DCE port 1 m 5 DCE port2 The values of rs232PortIndex for the carrier 3161 DSU CSU are m 1 DCE port 1 m 2 DCE port 2 or COM port depending upon configuration The values of rs232Portlndex for the 3164 DSU CSU are m 1 port m 2 Modem port m 3 Auxiliary RS 232 port m 4 DCE port 1 m 5 DCE port2 m 6 port m 7 DCE port 4 The values of rs232Portlndex for the 3165 DSU CSU are m 1 port m 2 Modem port m 3 DCE port 1 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects General Port Table rs232PortType Object rs232PortEntry 2 This object is used to identify the port s hardware type Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU 1S232 2 Used to identify the MODEM AUX and COM ports rs422 3 Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as EIA 530A or RS 449 m 35 5 Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as V 35 General Port Table rs232PortInSigNumber Object rs232PortEntry 3 This object contains the number of input signals contained in the input signal table This is the number of signals that can be detected This number is 2 for the synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM AUX and COM ports Genera
140. ary 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Starting a DTE Loopback The DTE Loopback command DLB loops the received signal on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port back to the DTE without change DTE pip NETWORK DSX 1 INTERFACE gt PORT2 PORT 1 2967143102 gt Procedure To perform a DTE loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk Ptrns x l c 3 From the Loopback screen press the gt key until the DLB selection appears on the screen 4 Select DLB Loopback A PLB i x J eJ Bg Test Started appears on Line 2 If a DTE loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 25 4 Maintenance Starting a Repeater Loopback The Repeater Loopback command RLB loops the signal being sent to the network back to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 and data ports The signal is looped back as close to the network interface as possible after it has passed through the framing circuitry of the DSU CSU Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected NETWORK Base INTERFACE pee gt ALL 15 PORT1 PORT2 496 14318 02 gt Procedure To perform a
141. as they appear with the standalone DSU CSU If a password is required the Login screen displays the prompt for password input Refer to Entering a Password to Gain Access on page H 14 To move between the Screen area and the Screen Function Keys area Figure H 1 Main Menu Screen press Ctrl a Control key and a From the Screen area you may select the Status Test Configuration or Control branches February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Ending an Asynchronous Terminal Session To end the async terminal session from any screen press Ctrl a to move from the Screen area to the Screen Function Keys area Figure H 1 Main Menu Screen and then select Exit main Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx Status Test Configuration Control Screen Area lt M Screen Function Ctrl a to access these functions Keys Area Figure H 1 Main Menu Screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 3 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Menu Organization Async terminal menus differ from front panel menus in that they typically do not use abbreviations and in some cases provide a more direct access to an option or function Figure H 2 Menu Organization shows the organization of the async terminal menu tree Cross Connect Display Call Administer Start Select Status LEDs Directories Password Download LEDs System an
142. ata port interface Map data from one port to another To allocate DSO channels begin by defining the logical channel configuration for the network interface and then the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface and then any ports if desired See Figure 3 6 Example of Channel Allocation for an example of a conceptual diagram of a channel configuration Blank configuration worksheets are provided at the back of Appendix C Configuration Options To complete the configuration worksheets for DSO channel allocation 1 Complete the Network Interface and the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface tables unless the DTE Drop Insert interface is disabled as shown in the examples in Figure 3 7 Example of Interface Worksheet for Network Interface and Figure 3 8 Example of Interface Worksheet for DTE Drop Insert Interface Complete the Robbed Bit Signaling RBS information worksheet as shown in the examples in Figure 3 9 Example of RBS Information Worksheet Using the worksheets shown in Figure 3 10 Port Channel Configuration Worksheet Ports 1 and 2 and Figure 3 11 Port Channel Configuration Worksheet Ports 3 and 4 circle the configuration options needed to implement the logical channel configuration Once you have completed the worksheets enter this information using the procedures in Allocating Data Ports on page 3 38 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 29 3 Operation DTE DROP INSERT DSX 1 INTERFACE
143. ature is available it is not required as a factory default If used it ensures access security before device control is passed to a device connected to a port The password configuration option can be individually set for the COM or MODEM port or both if security is needed on both port types The default is None The password itself is set separately refer to the following section Setting a Password on page 3 49 p Procedure To establish access security on a port 1 2 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Select Edit From the Edit screen press the gt key until the User selection appears on the Screen February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 5 Select User Edit d A Chan Gen User Zx e Bo 6 Press F1 Next until the Password configuration option appears 7 Select port s to receive access security None Com Modem or Both Use the scroll keys if necessary Password None A Next Com A es eee Setting a Password In addition to establishing access security on a port refer to the previous section Establishing Access Security on a Port on page 3 48 the password itself is set Unless you specify otherwise the password is null B gt Procedure To set a passwo
144. cal DSU CSU s EDL is enabled then the remote device s EDL must also be enabled 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 7 C Configuration Options Network Interface Configuration Options Table C 3 Network Interface Configuration Options 1 of 3 NET Framing ESF Factory 1 D4 Factory 2 Next D4 ESF Prev Network Line Framing Format The framing format to be used on the network interface D4 Configures for the D4 framing format ESF Configures for the Extended Superframe format NET Coding B8ZS Factory 1 AMI Factory 2 Next AMI B8ZS Prev Network Line Coding Format The line coding format to be used on the network interface AMI Configures for the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format B8ZS Configures for the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format LBO 0 0 Next 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Prev Line Build Out The line build out LBO for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 dB is the factory default ANSI PRM Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Generate ANSI Performance Report Messages Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliant performance report messages PRMs are generated Enab Generates and sends ANSI PRMs over the FDL every second Disab Prevents the DSU CSU from generating ANSI PRMs NOTE This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF Mgmt Link Disab Next Enab Disab Prev FDL Management Link Specifies whether Faci
145. cation Port Rate Configures the bit rate for the communication port 1 2 Sets the bit rate to 1200 bps for asynchronous operation only 2 4 Sets the bit rate to 2400 bps 4 8 Sets the bit rate to 4800 bps 9 6 Sets the bit rate to 9600 bps 14 4 Sets the bit rate to 14 400 bps 19 2 Sets the bit rate to 19 200 bps 38 4 Sets the bit rate to 38 400 bps This rate is not supported for carrier mounted DSU CSUs NOTE This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for synchronous operation and the clock source is external Char Length 8 Next 7 8 Prev Communication Port Character Length Configures the character length 7 or 8 bits for the communication port NOTES This configuration option must be set to 8 if the communication port is used as the network communication link This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for synchronous operation CParity None Next None Even Prev Communication Port Parity Configures the parity none even or odd for the communication port NOTE This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for synchronous operation 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 23 C Configuration Options C 24 Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 7 of 10 CStop Bits 1 Next 1 1 5 2 Prev Communication Port Stop Bits C
146. cationFailure events to the currently configured trap manager s NOTE This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option see Alarm Configuration Options on page C 28 is disabled Entp Trap Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Enterprise Specific Traps Specifies whether enterpriseSpecific traps are enabled Enab Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events to the currently configured trap manager s Disab Disables the sending of trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events NOTE This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option see Alarm Configuration Options on page C 28 is disabled Link Trap Both Next Disab Up Down Both Prev Link Trap Type Specifies the link trap type to enable Interfaces monitored for linkUp and linkDown traps are specified with the Trap I F configuration option Disab Disables the sending of trap messages for linkDown or linkUp events Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events to the currently configured trap manager s Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events to the currently configured trap manager s Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events to the currently configured trap manager s NOTE This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option see Alarm Configuration Options on page C 28 is disabled February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21
147. cations COM port An external LAN Adapter can be connected to either the COM port or the auxiliary AUX port to provide Ethernet connectivity Also the DSU CSU can be daisy chained together by connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other providing SNMP connectivity The SNMP management system can communicate to the DSU CSU remotely through the Facility Data Link FDL or for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs the synchronous data port s Embedded Data Link EDL Physical Description The 316x Series consists of a Model 3160 DSU CSU 2 port a Model 3164 DSU DSU 4 port a Model 3165 DSU CSU 1 port and a Model 3161 carrier mounted DSU CSU For more information about the carrier mounted DSU CSU refer to the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Standalone DSU CSU Front Panel The standalone DSU CSU front panel contains m One 2 line 16 alphanumeric character per line liquid crystal display LCD m One 7 button keypad three Function and four directional keys m Twelve light emitting diodes LEDs m Six test jacks for the Model 3160 3164 DSU CSU and two test jacks for the Model 3165 DSU CSU The front panels are shown in Figure 1 1 3160 DSU CSU Front Panel Figure 1 2 3164 DSU CSU Front Panel and Figure 1 3 3165 DSU CSU Front Panel 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 1 3 1 Introduction LCD ACCULINK N
148. cessive Error Rate Threshold Sets the error rate threshold that determines if an Excessive Error Rate EER condition is declared This rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Select from the following 10E 4 EER is declared if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected within 10 seconds factory default 10E 5 EER is declared if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds 10E 6 EER is declared if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds 10E 7 EER is declared if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds 10E 8 EER is declared if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals 10E 9 EER is declared if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 Table C 8 Alarm Configuration Options 4 of 4 AlrmRelay Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Alarm Relay Specifies whether an alarm condition for this circuit card activates the shared alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier The alarm deactivates if the condition s causing it is corrected An Alarm Cut Off issued from the SDCP or PC Emulation program for a particular carrier mounted DSU CSU also deactivates the alarm The carrier mounted DSU CSU does not reactivate the alarm relay until all alarm conditions for the unit a
149. chemes this appendix describes an addressing scheme for typical customer network management system NMS scenarios This appendix is not intended to be an IP addressing or routing tutorial and a basic understanding of IP and 31xx Series devices is assumed The following notes apply to these scenarios 3160 A2 GB21 90 Connections to remote devices may be via EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs or FDL however the FDL is only available on full T1 links not fractional T1s Check with the service provider to be sure that the FDL is end to end i e not terminated at an intermediate point within the network Interconnected 31xx Series devices automatically pass routing information between them however a static route to the subnet s must be set in the routing table of the NMS host This route uses the 31xx Series device connected to the LAN via the LAN Adapter or the NMS via a direct PPP or SLIP connection as a gateway to the subnet s In all instances the addressing scheme presented works for both the LAN and the direct connections Although routing table entries are maintained automatically by 31xx Series devices without the need for user configuration only a maximum of 100 routes is supported for a given device The choice of a host address within a given subnet is completely arbitrary Choose any legal host address for a given subnet without regard to the local or remote devices Although the default route to the NMS i
150. condition Since this function only affects the 3000 Series Carrier it is only available for carrier mounted DSU CSUs The alarm relay function must first be enabled by the Alarm Relay configuration option refer to Appendix C Configuration Options gt Procedure To deactivate the alarm relay 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select ACO Control A ACO Rel 4 The Command Complete screen appears Alarm Cut Off A Command Complete x m 5 amp 3 64 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Resetting the DSU CSU Use the Reset command to perform a power on reset of the DSU CSU p Procedure To reset the DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen press the gt key until the Reset selection appears on the screen 4 Select Reset Control A ClrReg Reset SAS 5 From the Device Reset screen press F1 to initiate a reset of the DSU CSU the power up Sequence screen appears Press F2 instead to return to the Control screen without initiating a reset Device Reset A Yes x amp Download Operations NOTE The Download command is for use by service personnel
151. connected N1 to D10 N3 to D11 and N5 to D15 RS 232 like MIB RFC 1317 The rs232 object defined by RFC 1317 is supported for all of the synchronous data ports the MODEM port the COM port and the AUX port The RS 232 like MIB consists of one object and five tables as follows m Number of RS 232 like ports m The General Port Table m The Asynchronous Port Table m The Synchronous Port Table m The Input Signal Table m The Output Signal Table The Asynchronous Port table is not supported by the DSU CSU for the synchronous data ports The Input Signal and Output Signal tables are not supported for the MODEM AUX and COM ports The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the RS 232 like MIB when it is not clear how the object definition in MIB is related to the DSU CSU Number of Ports rs232Number Object rs232 1 This object contains the number of ports in the RS 232 like general port table This number is 5 for the 3160 7 for the 3164 3 for the 3165 and 2 for the 3161 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 19 E SNMP MIB Objects General Port Table RS 232 like MIB E 20 The general port table contains general configuration objects for the RS 232 like interfaces General Port Table rs232PortIndex Object rs232PortEntry 1 This object contains a unique value for each port and is used as an index into the general port table rs232PortTable The values of the rs232Portlndex object v
152. croll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Mgmt selection appears on the screen 5 Select Mgmt Edit A User Alarm Mgmt x lt J a 6 From the Mgmt Config screen select Trap Mgmt Config A Gen Trap A Gm 1 xj 7 Press F1 Next until the Trapn IP Address configuration option appears 8 Press F2 Edit to edit the IP address You have the option of using F3 Clear to reset the IP address to the factory default 000 000 000 000 Refer to Setting the IP Address on page 3 21 for more information on setting an IP address 9 Press F1 Next until the Trapn Destination configuration appears and select the destination for the SNMP trap by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Trapn Dst a Next None Com x 5 C 3 28 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Configuring DSO Channels The DSU CSU provides channel configuration options that allow you to do the following Display the DSO assignments for the network DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 and data port interfaces Allocate DSO channels on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to the network interface Allocate DSO channels on the network or DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to particular data ports Clear deallocate all DSO channels from the network DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 or d
153. cs are missing this field will display Complete No otherwise it will display Complete Yes This field is only displayed when Far is selected from the Prtn screen February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Alarms 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance The DSU CSU can be attached either locally or remotely to an ASCII terminal or printer to display or print alarm messages Alarms can also be displayed on a PC that is using a terminal emulation package For standalone DSU CSUS you can route these alarms to the MODEM port the COM port or both For carrier mounted DSU CSUS you can route them to the COM port or dial them out using an external device Each alarm message contains a customer identification to indicate which remote DSU CSU is reporting an alarm For information about customer identification refer to Displaying Unit Identity in Chapter 3 Operation Possible alarm messages are as follows Continuous Loss Of Signal detected at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE WB Alarm Cleared Loss Of Signal condition at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at the x Interface where xis either Network or DTE WB Alarm Cleared Out Of Frame condition at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE WB Alarm Indication Signal received at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE Alarm Cleared Alarm Indication Signal at the x In
154. d 1 Signal Ground SG 102A 19 Receive Ground RC 102B 20 Send Common SC 37 Send Data SD 103 To DSU CSU 4 A 22 B Receive Data RD 104 From 6 A DSU CSU 24 B Request to Send RS 105 To DSU CSU 7 25 B Clear to Send CS 106 From 9 A DSU CSU 27 B Receiver Ready RR 109 From 13 A DSU CSU 31 B Data Mode DM 107 From 11 A DSU CSU 29 B Terminal Ready TR 108 1 2 To DSU CSU 12 A 30 B Terminal Timing TT 113 To DSU CSU 17 A 35 B Send Timing ST 114 From 5 A DSU CSU 23 B Receive Timing RT 115 From 8 A DSU CSU 26 B Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU CSU 10 Remote Loopback RL 140 To DSU CSU 14 Test Mode 142 From 18 DSU CSU D 10 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments EIA 530 A to V 35 Cable Interface The EIA 530 A to V 35 adapter Figure D 8 EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter provides the V 35 interface shown in Table D 9 V 35 Cable Interface 530 DB25 MS34 V 35 SIGNAL PLUG SOCKET SIGNAL SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS CTS RLSD DSR SIG COMMON SHIELD TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS CTS RLSD DSR SIG COMMON TT A TT B DTR RL LL SIG COMMON TT A TT B DTR RL LL TM Z zrsecuumouuosxeec d070 497 15233 Figure D 8 530 0 35 Adapter 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 D 11 D Pi
155. d This message is only Connected displayed for standalone DSU CSUs Master Clk fail The master clock has failed Timing for the DSU CSU is provided by the internal clock DSU Operational This message only appears if there are no valid alarm or status messages Performance Reports When the network interface is configured for ESF operation network performance is continuously monitored and maintained in two sets of aggregate registers Carrier Network Interface Registers Telco and User Network Interface Registers User The User registers contain an extra status register Status Event Registers shown on the front panel LCD are listed in Table 4 3 Performance Registers These registers are status registers that collect performance data for the previous 24 hour period Performance data is updated in 15 minute intervals After 15 minutes the current interval is rolled over into a set of accumulator registers that represent the previous 96 15 minute intervals for the register An interval total of how many of the 96 registers contain valid data is also kept as well as a 24 hour total for each accumulator register For 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS port performance is continuously monitored and maintained in memory registers when the port is configured to use EDL The DSU CSU maintains two sets of port registers for each synchronous data port far end port registers and near end port registers These registers are status registers
156. d Performance Identity Call Customer ID System Select Reset Test Status Statistics Setup Alarm Monitor Device Relay Jack Cut Off DTE Channel Display Network amp Device DTE Tests Tests Network Port Channel Assignment Sync Data Display Display Port Tests Tests Sync Data Configuration Port Edit Display Network Clear Statistics Network DTE SyncData Cross General User Alarms Management Ports Ports Connect Options Interface amp Traps and Communication DTE to Sync Data Clear Network Port Assignments Assignments Assignments Front Communication External Telnet Auxiliary Internal Panel Port Device Sessions Port Modem Communication General SNMP SNMP NMS SNMP Protocol Management Security Traps 496 14997 H 4 Figure H 2 Menu Organization February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Using Asynchronous Terminal Screens 3160 A2 GB21 90 m There are three types of async terminal screens m Menu screens list selections available through the menu system m Input screens allow you to edit or change information on a screen using screen function keys Table H 1 Screen Function Keys or keyboard keys Table H 2 Keyboard Keys m Display screens show the results from a data collection operation or they display device specific information The async terminal supports character matching for entering values in fields For example if the values for a f
157. demarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners A February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 A Important Safety Instructions 2 10 Read follow all warning notices and instructions marked the product included the manual This product when not powered by the optional direct feed cable is intended to be used with a 3 wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a 3 wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attemp
158. dentifiable group of bits that includes a sequence of bits for control framing etc A high speed connection oriented packet switching WAN protocol using variable length frames A technique that separates bits into identifiable groups An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic interfaces in MIB Il command providing read only access to SNMP MIB objects A physical connection to earth or other reference point High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by the International Standards Organization ISO A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the network Hertz A unit of frequency that equals one cycle per second February 2001 GL 5 Glossary ICMP ID branch interface Internet internetwork IP address ISO ITU kbps LAN LBO LCD LCP LED link layer protocol link trap LLB LOF LOFC loopback test LOS Lpbk branch manager SNMP master clock MB GL 6 Internet Control Management Protocol Internet protocol that allows for the generation of error messages tests packets and information messages related to IP Identity branch of the DSU CSU menu tree A shared boundary between functional units The worldwide internetwork which predominantly uses the TCP IP protocol An interconnected collection of networks also called an internet Internet Protocol address The
159. description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 8 technical specifications B 2 Port Configuration branch example of use 3 18 option table C 3 option worksheet C 45 power input cabling example 2 8 connector 1 5 1 7 D 15 consumption B 1 optional power sources 2 5 B 1 D 15 requirement B 1 troubleshooting 4 14 power module 1 7 B 1 power up self test displaying results 4 1 front panel indications 2 9 3 6 troubleshooting 4 14 problem determination See troubleshooting protocol link layer 3 19 3 23 Ptrns Test Patterns branch example of use 4 30 3160 A2 GB21 90 Q QRSS Test 4 30 R rate auxiliary port C 26 communications port C 23 external clock C 17 synchronous data port C 13 rear panel connectors See connectors rear panel physical description 1 5 Rel Release branch example of use 3 53 remote loopback 4 19 repeater loopback RLB 4 26 reset async terminal operation H 1 front panel indications 2 9 procedure 3 65 Reset branch example of use 3 65 Rlpbk Remote Loopback branch example of use 4 19 router applications 2 2 RS 449 interface D 10 3160 A2 GB21 90 Index S self test displaying results 4 1 front panel indications 2 9 3 6 troubleshooting 4 14 Send Ones configuration option C 3 C 4 serial crossover cable D 14 Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP procedure for configuring 3 23 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 3 20 F 1 SES Severely Errored Seconds report
160. displays two types of data m Messages such as alarms command test completion and action in progress m Front panel menu tree information see Appendix A Front Panel Menu Figure3 2 LCD The LCD displays status messages as requested via the Device Health and Status branch of the front panel menu see Device Health and Status in Chapter 4 Maintenance In addition the highest level status message appears on the front panel automatically if no front panel action has occurred at the DSU CSU for the past five minutes The LCD also lists commands configuration options and test results In most cases the top line shows the command or option name and default value while the second line displays options and responses When a response is required select from the options displayed directly above the Function keys F1 F2 F3 make your choice by pressing the corresponding Function key February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Keypad 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation The 7 button keypad Figure 3 3 Keypad enables you to navigate through the menu tree and select choices presented on the second line of the LCD Figure 3 3 Keypad Use the A key to move up the menu Use the X key to exit any part of the menu in which you may be operating You immediately return to the top level menu screen shown on the front panel menu see Appendix A Front Panel Menu Use the Function F1 F2 F3 keys to
161. du m me type Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 B Direct Feed Power Supply Warning A WARNING When energizing this product with the supplied direct feed power cable connect only to a SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage power source with a maximum available output of less than 240 VA Power configurations which utilize the direct feed cable to energize the equipment must only be installed by a qualified electrician in restricted area access locations in accordance with articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electric Code NEC and articles 2 308 2 310 2 312 2 314 2 200 and 2 202 of the Canadian Electric Code CEC A readily accessible disconnect device as
162. e RJ48C to RJ48C 3100 F1 500 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to DA15P Canada 3100 F1 510 COM Port to PC Cable 8 pin modular to DB9S 3100 F1 550 Keyed for Models 3164 A2 and 3165 A2 COM Port to PC Cable 8 pin modular to DB9S 3100 F2 550 Unkeyed for Model 3160 A3 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable 8 pin modular to DB25P 3100 F1 540 DC Power Cable 3100 F1 520 115 Vac Power Module 3100 F1 100 Front Panel Emulation Software 3100 C1 010 EIA 530 A to RS 449 422 Adapter 3100 F1 580 EIA 530 A to V 35 Adapter 3100 F1 570 EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter 3100 F1 571 Wall Mount Rack Mount Adapter 3100 F1 400 Model 3161 DSU CSU 3161 B3 010 Auxiliary Backplane 3100 F1 900 NOTE Cable numbers for the 3161 DSU CSU are located in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual February 2001 I 1 Equipment List I 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Glossary 1in8 Test 3000 Series Carrier ACAMI allocation method ACCULINK ACO Activ adapter address agent SNMP aggregate AIS AMI ANSI application ASCII ASCII terminal printer asynchronous data authenticationFailure trap AUX port 3160 A2 GB21 90 A test pattern consisting of a one 1 followed by seven zeros on the network only A rack mounted device containing 17 slots in which to place circuit cards Alternate Channel Alternate Mark Inversion A method of
163. e AUX port of the other providing SNMP or Telnet connectivity Use the MODEM port when accessing the DSU CSU through a dial up connection The COM port can support either synchronous or asynchronous PPP or asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 38 400 bps The AUX port can support data rates up to 38 400 bps The MODEM port can support either synchronous or asynchronous PPP or asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 2400 bps The example shown below assumes that the COM port is being used as the link to the SNMP or Telnet system p Procedure To select the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the User selection appears on the screen 5 Select User Edit mi A Chan Gen User A w e 7 ME CJ 6 Press F1 Next until the Com Use configuration option appears 7 Select Mgmt to configure the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link Com Use A Next Mgmt ASCII J Bt amp February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Setting the IP Address 3160 A2 GB21 90 The IP address is the address used by the SNMP or Telnet system to access the DSU CSU see Appendix F P Network Addressing Scenarios For DSU CSUs using
164. e Channel Config screen select DTE t Channel Config a Dsply Clear DTE R 1 7 ME CJ 3 42 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 7 From the DTE Channels screen press F1 to select Assign DTE Channels A Assign Voice X 8 3 8 Press the Function key below the network channel desired Each time that you press the Function key the DTE channel number will scroll up one number If the network channel is currently unassigned is displayed on Line 2 the DTE channel number initially displays the same number as the corresponding network channel number However if the network channel is currently assigned the DTE channel number is shown as Dn Pressing the Function key for D24 wraps the display back to D1 Only those channels that are not already assigned will appear on the LCD when scrolling The network channels assigned to ports Prt1 Prt4 are unavailable for assignment p Procedure To specify DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 channels used to carry voice information 1 Press A from the channel allocation screen to return to the DTE Channels screen 2 From the DTE Channels screen press F2 to select Voice DTE Channels A Assign Voice x Je Bt amp 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 43 3 Operation 3 Line 1 displays the 24 DSO channels for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Pressi
165. e Com Link configuration option appears 8 Press F2 PPP or F3 SLIP Com Link n A PPP SLIP x m 1 6 Specifying the Community Name s and Access Type s You have the capability of specifying up to two community names community name 1 and community name 2 to be used by external SNMP managers when trying to access objects in the DSU CSU s MIB Once you specify the community name s you must then specify the type of access to the MIB that SNMP managers in the community are permitted to have p Procedure To specify the community name 1 and its access type 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the key until the Mgmt selection appears on the screen 3 24 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 5 Select Mgmt Edit A User Alarm Mgmt x eJ le m 6 From the Mgmt Config screen select Gen Mgmt Config Hes cC 7l 7 Press F1 Next until the CommunityName1 configuration option appears 8 Press F2 Edit to edit the community name CommunityName 1 UN Next Edit Clear A fj 1 el l9 NOTE Steps 9 and 10 describe the process for ent
166. e DTLB screen press the Function key for the port for which you want to perform the data terminal loopback Use the scroll keys if necessary Loopback DTLB 7 A Prti Prt2 Prt3 A Test Started appears Line 2 If a Data Terminal loopback is already in progress the Already Active message appears If an invalid combination of loopbacks is in progress the error message Invld Test Combo appears see Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations for valid loopback test combinations Aborting Loopbacks The Abort Loopback command stops all loopback tests or any selected loopback test currently active on the DSU CSU gt Procedure To abort one or more loopback tests 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk Ems A Je Bt amp 3 From the Loopback screen select Abort Loopback A Abort LLB PLB EE Eg 8 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 29 4 Maintenance Test Patterns 4 30 4 From the Loopback Abort screen press the desired Function key to abort All or one specific loopback test Use the scroll keys if necessary Loopback Abort A All LLB PLB CA m jJ el be If you select ALL LLB PLB DLB or RLB skip Step 5 From the Abort screen press the Function key that corresponds to the port for which you want to abort the t
167. e System Group Test gt Rlpbk gt LLBUP Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SenaLineCode Test gt Rlpbk gt LLBDN Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode Test gt Rlpbk gt 54UP gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Up Test gt Rlpbk gt 54DN gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Down Test gt Rlpbk gt FT1UP gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port nto testSendFT1UP Test gt Rlpbk gt FT1DN gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port nto testSendFT1Down Test gt Lpbk gt LLB Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt LLB Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1LineLoop Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop Test gt Lpbk gt PLB Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt PLB Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop Test gt Lpbk gt DLB Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt DLB Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1LineLoop Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop Test gt Lpbk gt RLB Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt RLB Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop Test Lpbk DCLB Prtn Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt Lpbk gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testFullDuplexLoopBack Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest Test gt Lpbk gt DTLB gt Prtn Test gt Lpbk gt Abort gt DTLB gt Prtn Set IfExtn
168. e traps to an SNMP manager s from this device you must specify the number of SNMP managers that are to receive the traps p Procedure To specify the number of SNMP managers to receive traps from this device 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Mgmt selection appears the screen 5 Select Mgmt Edit A User Alarm Mgmt a EJ e 3 6 From the Mgmt Config screen select Trap Mgmt Config A Gen Trap A SASS 7 Select the number of SNMP managers to receive traps from 1 through 6 by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Num Trap Mgrs 1 Next 1 m tJ 0 e C 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 27 3 Operation Configuring a Destination for SNMP Traps A destination must be configured for each SNMP trap manager specified This configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers specified by the Number of Trap Managers configuration option B gt Procedure To configure an IP address for the SNMP trap manager 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the s
169. ected test pattern active on the DSU CSU p Procedure To abort test patterns 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Ptrns Test A Ripbk Lpbk ERI x m 1 Be 3 From the Patterns screen select Abort Patterns A Re Send Mon A BM its amp 4 From the Patterns Abort screen press the desired Function key to abort either All active test patterns active Send test patterns or the active Monitor Mon test pattern Patterns Abort A All Send Mon x ee pes eo RS If you select All the DSU CSU terminates all active test patterns and displays the message Command Complete Skip Step 5 NOTE If you mistakenly choose to abort a test pattern that is not currently running a Command Complete message still displays and the test pattern currently active still runs Use the TStat branch to view the test status to determine if the abort was successful 4 34 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance 5 From the Abort screen press the Function key that corresponds to the network or port for which you want to abort a test pattern Use the scroll keys if necessary Abort Send or Mon A NET Prti Prt2 a MEER The DSU CSU terminates the selected test pattern and displays the message Command Complete Lamp Test Use the Lamp Test commands to start and stop a tes
170. ed on the network interface to initiate LLBs see Appendix C Configuration Options The data port configuration option NET DCLB controls whether the DSU CSU responds to inband V 54 commands to initiate DCLB for that port see Appendix C Configuration Options Local loopback tests can be aborted Abort Command at any time No more than two local loopbacks can be active at any one time An additional restriction prohibits certain loopbacks from running at the same time Valid loopback combinations listed in Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations are identified by YES Table 4 8 Valid Loopback Combinations LLB PLB DCLB DTLB LLB N A NO YES YES NO YES PLB NO N A YES NO NO YES DLB YES YES N A NO YES YES RLB YES NO NO N A NO YES DCLB NO NO YES NO YES YES on separate ports on separate ports DTLB YES YES YES YES YES YES on separate ports on separate ports 4 22 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Starting a Line Loopback The Line Loopback command LLB loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network without change Wm NETWORK INTERFACE gt ALL 1s ALL 1s PORT2 PORT p Procedure To perform a Line loopback 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Lpbk Test A Ripbk Lpbk Ptrns SASF 3 From the Loopback screen select
171. een detected on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface The condition is cleared when the density of ones to zeros received is 12 5 OOF at Net An Out Of Frame condition 2 out of 4 frame synchronization bits in error has been detected on the network interface The condition is cleared when a reframe occurs OOF at DTE An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface The condition is cleared when a reframe occurs AlS at Net An Alarm Indication Signal unframed all ones signal is being received by the network interface AIS at DTE An Alarm Indication Signal is being received by the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface EER at Net An Excessive Error Rate condition has been detected on the network interface the bit error rate has exceeded the configured threshold for ESF framing The condition is cleared when the error rate falls below the threshold value Yellow at Net A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the network interface Yellow at DTE A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface OOF at Prtn An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on data port Prtn where nis the port number This condition only occurs if the synchronous data port s Embedded Data Link EDL is enabled only available for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS EER at Prtn The error rate of the received signal has exceeded the configured
172. een wire to a suitable ground 3 Connect the orange and blue wires to the 48 Vdc input source 4 Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation 5 Plug the power connector into the DSU CSU DSU CSU POWER PLUG TO CUSTOMER SUPPLIED BATTERY BLACK 48 VDC RETURN RED GREEN GROUND WHITE ORANGE BLUE I 48 VDC INPUT 99 14299 02 Figure 2 10 48 Vdc Single Source Power Supply Pinouts 2 6 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 2 Installation Installing the Redundant 48 Vdc Power Supply To install the DSU CSU using a redundant 48 Vdc SELV power supply refer to Figure 2 11 48 Vdc Redundant Source Power Supply Pinouts and use the following procedure p Procedure To install the redundant 48 Vdc power supply 1 Connect the black wire to the 48 Vdc return source B Connect the red wire to the 48 Vdc return source A Connect the green wire to a suitable ground Connect the orange wire to the 48 Vdc input source Connect the blue wire to the 48 Vdc input source A Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation DO oO A CO Plug the power connector into the DSU CSU DSU CSU POWER PLUG TO CUSTOMER SUPPLIED BATTERY BLACK 48 VDC RETURN B RED 48 VDC RETURNA GREEN GROUND WHITE ORANGE 48 VDC INPUT B BLUE 48 VDC INPUT A 99 14300 02 Figure 2 11 48 Vdc Redundant Source Power Supply
173. el A DTE A Gm 1 Le Providing Backup Capability If the T1 network fails the DSU CSU provides the ability to reconfigure the unit and restore at least partially priority data circuits through an external backup device You can store backup configuration options in the Customer 2 set of customer defined configuration options The Enterprise MIB variable devConfigAreaCopy allows the entire contents of one configuration area to be copied into another configuration area via SNMP By cross connecting two synchronous data ports to each other one port can provide a backup path for the other As soon as the ports are configured to be mapped to each other Data Set Ready DSR for the ports is turned on The external backup device can be configured to initiate dialing when it detects the off to on transition of DSR Selecting the Timing Source The DSU CSU provides the ability to select a master clock timing source that is used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the DSU CSU The clock for each interface is at the appropriate rate for that interface e g 1 544 Mbps for the T1 interfaces the configured port rate for the data ports and it is independent of the master clock rate This means that the master clock rate and the DSU CSU interface rates may be different The clock source configuration options enable you to select either the network interface a synchronous data por
174. el Net DCLB Disable V 54 FT1 Both Loopback Port DTE Initiated Port LB Disable DTLB DCLB Both Loopbacks Embedded Data Link EDL Enable Disable EDL Management Link Mgmt Link Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 Threshold 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near End Performance Near end Disable Maintain Send Statistics Both Far End Performance Far end Disable Maintain Statistics February 2001 H 17 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation H 18 Sync Data Port Options Port 3 Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Port Type Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Port Base Rate Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Transmit Clock Source Tx Clock Internal External Invert Transmit Clock InvertTxC Enable Disable Invert Transmit and InvrtData Enable Disable Received Data Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones Disable DTR RTS Both Not Ready Action on Network Yellow Rev Yellow None Halt Alarm Network Init Data Channel Net DCLB Disable V 54 FT1 Both Loopback Port DTE Initiated Port LB Disable DTLB DCLB Both Loopbacks Embedded Data Link EDL Enable Disable EDL Management Link Mgmt Link Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10 6 Threshold 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near End Performance Near end Disable Maintain Send Statistics Both Far End Performance Far end Disable Maintain Statistics February 2001
175. ent This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant Canada NOTICE TO USERS OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE NETWORK The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request to disconnect the equipment CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspec
176. er by pressing the Function key under that number When you make the selection the DSU CSU allocates the correct amount of DSO channels to support the data rate currently configured for the port Clear Deallocates all DSO channels for this port from the network interface or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface NOTE This configuration option is not available if the individual channel allocation method Chan is selected using the Assign By configuration option or if Prtn is selected using the Assign To configuration option C 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options 4 of 4 N1 N2 N4 N5 N6 N7 NO N10 N11 N12 N24 Next Prev OR Di D2 D4 D5 D6 D7 DI D10 Dii D12 D24 Next Prev Data Port Channel Allocation appears for the individual channel method only Designates the DSO channel to allocate to this port N1 N24 for the network interface and D1 D24 for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface or the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel indicated in Line 1 Possible values for Line 2 are Value Meaning This DSO channel is not allocated You can modify this value on this screen Prtn This DSO channel is allocated to port n where nis a nu
177. erfaces has just come up These traps are set by the Link Trap configuration option The communications interfaces for which these traps can be generated are specified by the Trap I F configuration option Table 4 5 SNMP Trap per Interface defines traps for each interface February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance 3160 A2 GB21 90 Table 4 4 Enterprise Specific Trap Definitions Trap Value Event enterpriseClockFail 1 The currently configured master clock source has failed enterpriseSelfTestFail 2 A DSU CSU hardware failure is detected at self test This trap is generated after DSU CSU initialization enterpriseDeviceFail 3 An internal DSU CSU failure is detected by the operating software enterpriseTestStart 5 A test is initiated enterpriseConfigChange 6 A configuration option is changed enterpriseTestClear 105 A test is concluded Table 4 5 SNMP Trap per Interface Interface Trap Meaning T1 Network Up No alarm or test conditions Down Alarm or test conditions DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Up No alarm or test conditions and the interface is enabled Down Alarm or test conditions or the interface is disabled Synchronous Data Ports Up No test conditions the port is assigned to a network interface and both CTS and DSR are ON Down Test conditions the port is unassigned or either CTS or DSR is off February 20
178. ering text strings for Mgmt configuration options This process applies to entering any text strings into Mgmt configuration options 9 Use the lt and gt keys to position the cursor under the character you want to change Press F1 Up or F2 Down to scroll through the valid numbers characters for the text string public a Up Down Save a The F1 Up key scrolls through the ASCII character set the following order numbers 0 9 lowercase letters a z uppercase letters A Z space character ASCII symbols ascending order based on ASCII code and the End of Line symbol The lt erases all characters to the right of the cursor 10 When you are through changing the community name you must press F3 Save to save the value Otherwise the original value will be retained 11 Press F1 Next until the Access 1 configuration option appears February 2001 3 25 3 Operation 12 Press F2 Read or F3 R W Access 1 A Next Read R W A m ej el be The Read selection allows read only access SNMP Get to the accessible objects in the MIB when community name 1 is used The R W selection allows Read Write access SNMP Get and Set to the objects in the MIB Write access is allowed for all objects specified as read write in the MIB Read access is allowed for all objects specified as read only or read write Configu
179. erval m 051 Far End Total These tables are not supported for either the network or DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects DS1 Fractional Group DS1 E1 MIB The DS1 Fractional Group consists of the DS1 fractional table This table dsx1FracTable is fully supported by the DSU CSU and allows channel time slots to be mapped between the T1 interfaces and data ports If an invalid channel map e g two interfaces mapped to a single time slot one interface mapped to two T1s etc is received an error will be returned to the SNMP manager The DSU CSU will validate all channel configurations before applying them Operational Note The fractional T1 group only allows specification of an entire interface to a particular time slot on another interface i e a time slot on one interface cannot be mapped to a time slot on another interface This prevents complete mapping of time slots on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to time slots on the network interface For mapping time slots between the network and DTE T1 interfaces the following convention is used Time slots on the T1 interface that are mapped to another T1 interface i e not a data port are connected in ascending order For example if the fractional table for the network interface maps time slots 1 3 and 5 to the DTE T1 interface and the DTE T1 interface maps time slots 10 11 and 15 to the network the following time slots will be
180. est Use the scroll keys if necessary Abort Test Name A Prti Prt2 Prt3 A ae E When abort is complete the message Command Complete appears on the Abort screen NOTE If you mistakenly choose to abort a loopback test that is not currently running a Command Complete message will still display and the loopback that is currently active will still be running Use the TStat branch to view the test status to determine if the abort was successful Use the Test Pattern commands to send monitor and abort test patterns Available test patterns are QRSS A quasi random signal source approximating live data that can be monitored for logic errors on the network and the data ports 1 in 8 A test pattern consisting of a one 1 followed by seven zeros on the network only 511 A pseudo random bit sequence PRBS that is 511 bits long on the data ports only This is a PRBS 2 1 test February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Sending Test Patterns Use the Send command to start transmission of a test pattern Only one test pattern can be active at a time on one port Table 4 9 Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations lists the valid send test pattern combinations Valid combinations are identified by YES p Procedure To send a test pattern 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen select Ptrns Test A Ripbk Lpbk Ptrns
181. estSendQRSS Initiates a Send QRSS test on the interface Only supported for the data ports testSend511 Initiates a send 511 test on the interface Only supported for the data ports testSendV54Up Sends a V54 up code to the remote unit Only supported for the data ports testSendV54Down Sends a V54 down code to the remote unit Only supported for the data ports testSendFT1Up ends a FT1 up code to the remote unit Only supported for the data ports testSendFT1Down Sends a FT1 down code to the remote unit Only supported for the data ports February 2001 E 25 E SNMP MIB Objects E 26 Where these object identifiers are defined as follows m testLoopDTLB OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 2 m testMonQRSS OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 3 m testMon511 OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 4 m testSendQRSS OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 5 m testSend511 OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 6 m testSendV54Up OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 7 m testSendV54Down OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 8 m testSendFT1Up OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 9 m testSendFT1Down OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownTests 10 Generic Interface Test Table ifExtnsTestResult Object ifExtnsTestEntry 5 This object contains the result of the most recently requested test Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m none 1 No te
182. et Protocol addressing agent SNMP 1 3 AIS Alarm Indication Signal condition ASCII terminal printer message 4 11 Device Health and Status message 4 4 front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 troubleshooting 4 15 Alarm Configuration branch example of use 3 26 option table C 28 option worksheet C 44 alarm messages See messages alarm allocation DSO channel 3 29 AMI Alternate Mark Inversion C 2 applications 2 1 ASCII terminal printer cabling example 2 8 used for alarm messages 1 2 ATI Asynchronous Terminal Interface restoring H 1 authenticationFailure trap 4 12 AUX Port configuration option C 26 functional description 1 7 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 5 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 3 20 F 1 3160 A2 GB21 90 B B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution coding configuration option C 2 C 8 Self Test Health message 4 2 backup capability 3 45 BES Bursty Errored Seconds report 4 9 block method of channel allocation 3 40 BPV Bipolar Violation condition front panel LED indication 3 7 Performance Report message 4 10 troubleshooting 4 15 C cabling examples 2 8 pin assignments D 1 Chan Channel Configuration branch example of use 3 29 option table C 10 option worksheet C 47 C 48 C 50 C 51 channel allocation 3 29 configuration options C 10 procedure for configuring 3 29 CID Customer Identification branch example of use 3 11 Circuit Identifier configuration opt
183. ext Enab Disab Prev SNMP Trap Enable Specifies whether SNMP trap messages are sent over the SNMP management link Enab Enables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP management link Disab Disables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP management link NOTE For carrier mounted DSU CSUS that have the communication port enabled the only traps that are disabled are those that pertain to this particular unit Traps from other units are passed through Trap Disc Enab Next Enab Disab Prev SNMP Trap Disconnect Specifies whether the modem connection or carrier external communication port device connection is disconnected after sending a trap message This configuration option applies only to modem connections or carrier external communication port device connections initiated as a result of the trap message being sent Enab Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call is disconnected after a trap message is sent Disab Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call is not disconnected after a trap message is sent The line is held until it is manually disconnected or disconnected by the remote modem NOTE This configuration option is only available if SNMP traps are enabled and the integral modem or the carrier external communication port device is enabled and configured as an SNMP management link
184. for the network interface is correct 2 Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends 3 Contact your facility provider Message OOF at DTE appears 1 Incompatible framing format between the Drop Insert port on the customer premises equipment and the DSU CSU 2 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cabling problem 1 Check that the framing format for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is correct 2 Check that the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends 4 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Table 4 6 Troubleshooting 2 of 3 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Message 1 Network cable problem 1 Check that your network cable Yellow at Net appears 2 Far end device has lost framing sync on the line 3 Facility problem is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the status of the far end device 3 Contact your facility provider Message Yellow at DTE appears DTE has detected an LOS or LOF condition 1 Check the status of the DTE 2 Check that the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Message 1 Upstream device is 1 Check the status of the AIS at Net transmitting an AIS upstream device s RS 2 The network is transmitting 2 Contact your facility provider an AIS Message DTE is sending an AIS Check the DTE AIS at DTE appears Message EER
185. framing format with AMI line coding format for both the network and the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces Data ports are unassigned If neither of the factory default settings support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Use the Configuration Cnfig branch of the front panel menu tree to display or change DSU CSU configuration options see Appendix C Configuration Options February 2001 3 15 3 Operation Displaying Editing Configuration Options p gt Procedure To display edit configuration options 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig DSU ESF A Stat Test Cnfig 2 Sarit Be 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Load from a Activ Cust1 Aa a 8 8 GJ LE 3 Select Edit Choose Funct mu lew Save kea EM amp 4 From the Edit screen select the functional group you want to edit by pressing the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary The NET selection is shown as an example only Edit A Ee Port a lt J e a The configuration options for the selected functional group appear on the front panel one option at a time The option name appears on Line 1 with the current value next to it To reach othe
186. g C 2 line equalization C 2 line loopback LLB 4 23 link layer protocol 3 19 3 23 link trap 4 12 liquid crystal display LCD failure message 4 2 functional description 3 2 physical description 1 3 3 1 LOF Loss Of Frame condition front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 LOFC Loss Of Frame Count report 4 10 loopback front panel LED indication 3 6 local 4 22 abort 4 29 data channel loopback DCLB 4 27 data terminal loopback DTLB 4 28 DTE loopback DLB 4 25 C 3 D 3 line loopback LLB 4 23 payload loopback PLB 4 24 repeater loopback RLB 4 26 remote 4 19 LOS Loss Of Signal condition ASCII terminal printer message 4 11 Device Health and Status message 4 4 front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 Performance Report message 4 10 Self Test Health message 4 2 troubleshooting 4 14 Lpbk Local Loopback branch example of use 4 22 February 2001 IN 3 Index M maintenance device health and status 4 3 performance reporting 4 5 power up self test 2 10 4 1 manager SNMP 1 3 master clock functional description 3 45 procedure for configuring 3 47 messages alarm Performance Report 4 9 Self Test Health 4 2 troubleshooting 4 14 with ASCII terminal printer 1 2 4 11 status Performance Report 4 9 Self Test Health 2 9 4 2 Test Status 4 37 MIBs SNMP E 1 MODEM Port acquiring releasing the user interface 3 51 configuration option C 24 functional description 1 2 1 7 physical descrip
187. g F3 Clear to reset the IP address to the factory default 000 000 000 000 A Next X Edi Clear x J 893 5 03 9 Use the 1 and keys to position the cursor under the digit you want to change Press F1 Up to increment the digit or F2 Down to decrement the digit In this example you would press once to place the cursor under the middle digit in the first digit field then press F1 Up once to change the 0 to a 1 Continue in this manner to change the other digits 000 000 000 000 A Up Down Save 2 9 10 When you are through changing the IP address you must press Save to save the value Otherwise the original value will be retained 010 155 111 222 A Up Down Save 2 i Jl J ae 3 22 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Selecting the Link Layer Protocol 3160 A2 GB21 90 Two link layer protocols Point to Point Protocol PPP and Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager Telnet device or network device e g a router PPP can be used for synchronous or asynchronous operation SLIP can be used for asynchronous operation only NOTE The carrier mounted DSU CSU does not support synchronous operation on the COM port The standalone DSU CSU implementation of PPP supports the following m Full negotiation of PPP s Link Control Prot
188. g sent to the synchronous data DTE CYCLING Both ones and zeros are being sent to the synchronous data DTE CTS Yellow Monitors the state of interchange circuit CB CCITT 106 Clear to Send sent to the synchronous data DTE ON CTS is being asserted by the DSU CSU OFF CTS is not being asserted RTS Yellow Monitors the state of interchange circuit CA CCITT 105 Request to Send received from the synchronous data DTE ON RTS is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE OFF RTS is not being asserted February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation NOTE The following procedures are examples only Screen displays may vary depending on the model of the DSU CSU Displaying Unit Identity The identity of the DSU CSU serial number model number software revision level hardware revision level and customer identification is available through the Status branch of the front panel menu see Appendix A Front Panel Menu The customer identification is the only identity number you can change p Procedure To display the DSU CSU s identity ID 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat DSU ESF Bi A Stat Test Cnfig x 2 From the Status screen press the gt key until the ID selection appears on the screen 3 Select ID Status A LED ID ee 8 4 The following screens appear in the order lis
189. h 9 a through z and or A through Z 4 Use the Re Enter Password field to verify the new password 5 Select Save Once a password is saved the Login Records Saved message appears at the bottom of the screen main control admin_password Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx Enter New Password PASSWORD ENTRY Password Re Enter Password Re enter Password Save Password Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Save Figure H 9 Setting a Password 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 13 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Entering a Password to Gain Access When access security is required the Login screen Figure H 10 Entering a Password appears before you can access the Main Menu screen The password must be entered m f the password is valid the DSU CSU s top level menu appears m f the password is invalid an invalid password message appears and the screen reappears and waits for password entry m an invalid password is entered three consecutive times the message User Interface Idle appears Telnet sessions are closed dial in connections are disconnected and an SNMP trap is generated login Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot Enter LOGIN Password Enter Password Ctrl a to access these functions Figure H 10 Entering a Password H 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Configuration Worksheets for the Asynchronous
190. he 3100 Series Front Panel Emulation software Async Terminal Interface Support Telnet Access The DSU CSU can be configured and managed from an asynchronous async terminal The async terminal s full screen display uses a menu hierarchy similar to the DSU CSU S front panel You can perform device management and configuration operations as if you are using the DSU CSU s front panel but you do not have the limitation of the 2 line 16 character LCD Remote async terminal operations can be performed using Telnet access Telnet is a Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP service that supports a virtual terminal interface February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 1 Introduction SNMP Management Support SNMP is a network management protocol that is used to monitor network performance and status and to report alarms i e traps To function SNMP requires a manager consisting of a software program housed within a workstation or PC an agent consisting of a software program housed within a device e g the DSU CSU and a Management Information Base MIB consisting of a database of managed objects The DSU CSU can be managed by any industry standard SNMP manager Two link layer protocols Point to Point Protocol PPP and Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager or network device e g a router The SNMP manager or network device can be directly connected to the communi
191. he arrangement of a system or network as defined by the characteristics of its functional units Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device Sometimes referred to as straps Central Processing Unit failure A Self Test Health message indicating a failure in the device s central processing unit Cyclic Redundancy Check A mathematical method of confirming the integrity of received digital data CRC using six check bits Canadian Standards Association Channel Service Unit A device that connects service user equipment such as a DSU to the local digital telephone loop protects the line from damage and regenerates the signal Control branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Clear To Send A signal indicating that the device is ready for the DTE to transmit data Usually occurs in response to Request To Send RTS Customer 1 configuration area The first of two sets of customer defined configuration options Customer 2 configuration area The second of two sets of customer defined configuration options The transmission standard that specifies 12 frames as a superframe that is used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits Connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of another device to provide SNMP connectivity The electrical interface between the device and the synchronous data terminal equipment An organized compilation of computerized data A 15 position connector used on cables
192. he current signal state Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m 2 The signal is asserted m off 3 The signal is not asserted Input Signal Table rs232InSigChanges rs232InSigEntry 4 This object is not supported by the DSU CSU 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 23 E SNMP MIB Objects Output Signal Table RS 232 like MIB This object contains entries for the output signals that can be asserted by the unit for each of the synchronous data ports Output Signal Table rs2320utSigName rs2320utSigEntry 2 This object contains the identification of a hardware output signal Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU cts 1 Clear To Send m dsr 4 Data Set Ready Output Signal Table rs2320utSigState rs2320utSigEntry 3 This object contains the current signal state Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m on 2 The signal is asserted m off 3 The signal is not asserted Output Signal Table rs2320utSigChanges rs2320utSigEntry 4 This object is not supported by the DSU CSU Generic Interface MIB Extensions RFC 1229 This generic interface MIB is an experimental MIB that provides extensions to the generic interface group defined in MIB Il This MIB describes three tables m Generic Interface Extension Table m Generic Interface Test Table W Generic Receive Address Table Only the generic interface test table is
193. he factory default NOTES This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only This option must be set to 8 to perform PC emulation or pass through operations or SNMP management Modem Parity Configures the parity for the modem port None is the factory default NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Modem Port Stop Bits Configures the number of stop bits for the modem port 1 is the factory default NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Long Space Disconnect Specifies how the modem disconnects a call This makes call disconnecting more robust and prevents invalid data at the remote modem if the call is disconnected To be effective the remote modem must be configured to disconnect if it detects continuous space NOTES This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 This configuration option is not available if the modem port is configured as an SNMP management link and the link is configured for synchronous operation 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 25 C Configuration Options C 26 Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 9 of 10 MolnActTm Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Modem Port Inactivity Timeout Specifies whether the modem port disconnects after a period of inactivity specified by the MoDiscTm configuration option Enab The modem port
194. he password screen first appears The following screen appears when you access a DSU CSU that has a password enabled Passwd A Up Down Done X jJ 2 5 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation p gt Procedure To enter a password 1 Use the keys to position the cursor under the desired character You must enter a character before the gt gt key moves the cursor to the next space to the right The lt key is not destructive Passwd Xxxxxxxx A Up Down Done A lt ri 2 Enter the required password Press F1 Up and F2 Down to scroll up and down through the valid characters numbers for the password You have five minutes to enter the correct password before the DSU CSU ends the session 3 Press F3 Done to indicate you are done entering the password If you enter an invalid password the message Invalid Password appears Acquiring Releasing the User Interface You can access the user interface from either the front panel the COM port the MODEM port for standalone DSU CSUs or the SDCP for carrier mounted DSU CSUs The DSU CSU allows only one user interface to be active at a time The front panel is the default user interface at power up or after a reset It is also the default during a software download or when a failure occurs at either the local or remote PC interface You can switch an inactive user interface to active if
195. his configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is set to AT or the communication port is disabled Com Type Async Next Async Sync Prev Communication Port Type Specifies whether the communication port uses synchronous or asynchronous operation when it is configured as the SNMP management link Async Configures the communication port for asynchronous operation Sync Configures the communication port for synchronous operation NOTES This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 This configuration option is not available if the Com Use configuration option is set to ASCII Daisy or Term In these cases the communication port is always asynchronous C 22 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 6 of 10 Com Clk Int Next Int Ext Prev Communication Port Synchronous Clock Specifies whether the communication port uses internal or external clocking when it is configured for synchronous operation Int Configures the communication port for internal clocking Ext Configures the communication port for external clocking NOTES This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only This configuration option is not available if the Com Type configuration option is set to Async Com Rate 9 6 Next 1 2 2 4 48 96 144 19 2 38 4 Prev Communi
196. hronous Port Table RS 232 like MIB E 22 Synchronous Port Table RS 232 like MIB E 23 Input Signal Table RS 232 like E 23 Output Signal Table RS 232 like E 24 m Generic Interface MIB Extensions RFC 1229 E 24 Generic Interface Test Table Generic Interface MIB E 25 Enterprise MIB e EEE E UE eee E 27 Correlation between Menu Commands and SNMP Objects E 28 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios OVerVIOW ers gina RACER TOR en ae igen Beles F 1 c see Sates cnt ar agn d F 2 Scenaltio 2 we EID Eis WE Les iain F 3 SC8riallO 9 uoi tut el RE RATE MIC E F 4 RE PIE F 5 epo F 6 G Front Panel Emulation 3160 A2 GB21 90 OVOlIVIGW si ea utu dx ms tud G 1 Installing Front Panel Emulation G 1 Starting Front Panel Emulation G 3 February 2001 Contents H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Overview 1 teens H 1 m Before Using the Asynchronous H 1 m Initiating an Asynchronous Terminal Session H 2 m Ending an Asynchronous Terminal Session H 3 m Menu
197. ication port you select Com If the default network is connected to the far end 31xx Series device over the FDL you select FDL The routing protocol uses the default network destination to route data that does not have a specific route None No default network destination Data that cannot be routed is discarded IPBus The default network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane This selection only appears for carrier mounted DSU CSUs which are not configured as the IP Bus Master Com The default network destination is the communication port This selection only appears if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt Modem The default network destination is the modem port This selection only appears if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt This selection does not appear on carrier mounted DSU CSUs Aux The default network destination is the auxiliary port This selection only appears if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt FDL The default network destination is FDL This selection only appears if the FDL management link is enabled EDL n For 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS the default network destination is the EDLn port where nis 1 4 This selection only appears in 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS if the synchronous data port s EDL management link is enabled NOTE If the chosen default network link is disabled or down data is discarded Return to this menu and choose another default ne
198. ield can be DTE NET or PORT and you enter a D and press Return Enter then the field automatically populates with the value DTE Once an operation is initiated status messages appear in the last row of the screen These include Please Wait when a command takes longer than five seconds and Command Complete Table H 1 Screen Function Keys Screen Function Key Usage M MainMenu Returns to the Main Menu screen E Exit Terminates the async terminal session R Refresh Updates the screen with the current information U PgUp Pages up to the previously displayed page of information D PgDn Pages down to the previously displayed page of information S Save Stores changes in nonvolatile memory February 2001 H 5 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation H 6 Table H 2 Keyboard Keys Keyboard Key Usage Ctrl a Moves the cursor between the Screen area and the Screen Function Keys area Esc Returns to the previous screen Tab Moves the cursor to the next field Back Shift Tab or Ctrl k Moves the cursor to the previous field Backspace Moves the cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Selects the next valid value for the field Delete Deletes the character that the cursor is on Up Arrow key or Ctrl u Moves the cursor up one field within a column on the same Screen Down Arrow key or Ctrl d Moves
199. iguration options The configuration options in Table C 4 DTE Channel Configuration Options only appear if the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port is enabled and you are using a 2 port or 4 port DSU CSU February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 4 DTE Channel Configuration Options DTE Channels Assign Voice DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Channel Assigns DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to DSO channels on the network interface and specifies which DSO channels carry voice signaling information Assign Assigns DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to the network interface Voice Specifies which DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface are voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit Signaling RBS information to the network interface N1 2 N3 5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N24 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Channel Allocation Assigns DSO channels from the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface to the network interface Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DSO channel indicated in Line 1 Possible values for Line 2 are Value Meaning This DSO channel is not allocated You can modify this value on this screen Prtn This DSO channel is allocated to port n where nis a number from 1 to 4 You cannot modify this value on this screen Dn This DSO channel is allocated to the DT
200. il status of these power up tests The power up self test consists of the following steps 1 Once the DSU CSU is plugged in the In Progress screen appears and the Fail LED blinks ON and Off continuously Self Test In Progress x OOF ALAM SER OOF ALR PDY NETWORK KD RXD OTS RTS 493 14302 2 All the LEDs then start to flash simultaneously in the pattern twice ON then Off Then the LCD begins to flash characters and numbers in the same pattern alternating with the flashing LEDs 3 If the self test is successful the Passed screen appears for one second the Fail LED turns Off and the OK LED lights Self Test Passed 493 14303 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 2 9 2 Installation If the self test fails the Failed screen appears for five seconds The Fail LED lights and an eight digit failure code xxxxxxxx is displayed for use by service personnel to determine the cause of the self test failure The DSU CSU continues to try to operate If you are in doubt about the results of the self test use the Self Test Health command to display the status of this test see Self Test Health in Chapter 4 Maintenance Self Test A Failed xxxxxxxx 25 Gm tJ e C x OOF ALAM E OOF ALRM PDY NETWORK OTR TKD HXD CTS RTS 493 14302 4 The top level menu screen appears DSU ESF A Stat Test Cnfig a
201. in the following sections The minimal set consists of m ipRouteDest m ipRoutelflndex The following objects are defaulted if not specified in the set PDU used to add a route m ipRouteMetric1 Defaulted to 1 hop m ipRouteMetric2 Defaulted to current slot for carrier devices and 1 for standalone devices m ipRouteType Defaulted to indirect m ipRouteMask Defaulted as specified in the MIB description The following objects are unused in the DSU CSU and setting them will have no effect on the operation of the IP implementation m ipRouteMetric3 ipRouteMetric4 ipRouteMetric5 Defaulted to 1 as specified in the MIB m ipRouteNextHop Defaulted to 0 0 0 0 The following read only objects must not be specified in the set PDU used to add a route m ipRouteProto Set to netmgmt 3 by software m ipRouteAge Defaulted to 999 m ipRoutelnfo Set to OBJECT IDENTIFIER 0 0 since it is unused February 2001 E 11 E SNMP MIB Objects IP Group ipRouteDest Object ipRouteEntry 1 The ipRouteDest object serves as the index to the routing table Since indexes for tables must be unique only one route per destination may appear in the table To ensure that no duplicate destinations appear in the routing table the ipRouteDest object of the ipRouteTable will be treated as described in RFC 1354 IP Forwarding Table MIB The destination IP address of this route An entry with a value
202. ing ComDisconnect Text Field Clear User Interface Telnet Sessions Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Telnet Session TnSession Enable Disable Password Required TnPaswd Enable Disable Inactivity Timeout TninActTm Enable Disable Disconnect Time TnDiscTm 1 60 Default 5 User Interface Internal Modem Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Modem Use Modem Use Terminal Mgmt ASCII Dial In Access Dial In Enable Disable Password Required Password Enable Disable Inactivity Timeout MinActTm Enable Disable Disconnect Time MDiscTm 1 60 Default 5 Modem Type Modem Type Asynchronous Synchronous Modem Rate Modem Rate 1 2 2 4 Character Length MChar L 7 8 Parity MParity None Even Odd Stop Bits MStop Bits 1 1 5 2 Long Space Disconnect LSpaceDisc Enable Disable 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 21 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation User Interface Auxiliary Port Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Port Use Aux Use None Mgmt Daisy Data Rate Kbps Aux Rate 9 6 14 4 19 2 38 4 Alarm and Trap Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold ASCII Alarm Messages Alrm Msg Disable Com Port Alarm amp Trap Dial Out DialOut Enable Disable Trap Disconnect Trap Disc Enable Disable Call Retry Call Retry Enable Disable Dial Out
203. ion C 10 CLOCK IN interface functional description 1 7 3 46 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 16 clocking configuration options C 16 principles of operation 3 45 technical specifications B 2 ClrReg Clear Performance Registers branch example of use 4 8 Cnfig Configuration branch C 1 coding line C 2 February 2001 IN 1 Index COM Port acquiring releasing the user interface 3 51 cabling example 2 8 configuration option C 19 functional description 1 7 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 6 reset H 1 used with ASCII terminal printer 2 8 4 11 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 3 20 F 1 community name configuration option C 33 procedure for configuring 3 24 configuration options C 1 procedure for changing 3 14 tables Alarm C 28 Channel C 10 DTE Interface C 2 General C 16 Network Interface C 8 Port C 3 SNMP C 32 User Interface C 18 worksheets C 42 H 15 connectors rear panel cabling examples 2 8 functional description 1 7 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 1 connects D CPU failure message 4 2 crossover cable D 14 CSS Controlled Slip Seconds report 4 10 Ctrl Control branch examples of use 3 11 3 12 3 49 3 53 3 55 3 58 3 60 3 64 3 65 4 8 Cust1 Customer 1 configuration area functional description 3 14 Cust2 Customer 2 configuration area functional description 3 14 cyclic redundancy check CRC error indication 4 9
204. ion Edit Display screen appears Figure H 6 Configuration Edit Display Screen main config edit Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY Network DTE Sync Data Ports Copy Ports Cross Connect General Options User Interface Alarms amp Traps Management and Communication Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Save Figure H 6 Configuration Edit Display Screen 3 Select a functional group to display or edit NOTE Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the DSU CSU For example DTE and Copy Ports are not displayed for the single port DSU CSU H 10 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Saving Edit Changes p Procedure To save edit changes 1 From the last edit screen select Save The Save Configuration To screen appears Figure H 7 Configuration Save Screen 2 From the Save Configuration To screen select a configuration option set Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 Save edit changes to the Current area when you want those changes to take effect immediately Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future use To protect you from accidentally exiting an edit session before saving your changes the system displays the Save Changes prompt if you select either MainMenu or Exit from an edit scree
205. ion is set to Mgmt or Daisy Modem The Trap Manager n network destination is the modem port This selection only appears if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt This selection does not appear on carrier mounted DSU CSUs Aux The Trap Manager n network destination is the auxiliary port This selection only appears if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy FDL The Trap Manager n network destination is the FDL management link This selection only appears if the FDL management link is enabled EDL n The Trap Manager n network destination is the EDLn port where nis 1 4 This selection only appears if the synchronous data ports EDL management link is enabled NOTE If the chosen destination link is disabled or down the traps are discarded Return to this menu and choose another destination 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 39 C Configuration Options C 40 Table C 10 Management Trap Configuration Options 2 of 3 Gen Trap Both Next Disab Warm Auth Both Prev General Trap Types Specifies the general trap types to enable Disab Disables the sending of trap messages for warmStart and authenticationFailure events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events to the currently configured trap manager s Auth Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events to the currently configured trap manager s Both Sends trap messages for warmStart and authenti
206. ion number See label on unit Ringer Equivalence number REN See label on unit Canadian Certification number See label on unit Canadian DOC Load number See label on unit Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire MVL NextEDGE OpenLane and Performance Wizard are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation ReachDSL and TruePut are tra
207. ional SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage dc power source Using the optional dc power cable the DSU CSU is capable of operating on either a 24 Vdc power source 48 Vdc single source battery or 48 Vdc redundant source batteries for power backup To use dc power choose one of the following power supply types Installing the 24 Vdc Power Supply To install the DSU CSU using 24 Vdc SELV power supply refer to Figure 2 9 24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts and use the following procedure p Procedure To install the 24 Vdc power supply 1 Connect the green wire to a suitable ground 2 Connect the white wire to the 24 Vdc return 3 Connect the orange wire to the 24 Vdc source 4 Cut the black red and blue wires off at the outer insulation 5 Plug the power connector into the DSU CSU 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 2 5 2 Installation DSU CSU POWER PLUG TO CUSTOMER SUPPLIED BATTERY BLACK X RED X GREEN GROUND WHITE 24 VDC RETURN ORANGE 24 VDC SOURCE BLUE 99 14298 02 Figure 2 9 24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts Installing the Single 48 Vdc Power Supply To install the DSU CSU using a single source 48 Vdc SELV power supply refer to Figure 2 10 48 Vdc Single Source Power Supply Pinouts and use the following procedure gt Procedure To install the 48 Vdc single source power supply 1 Connect the black and red wires to the 48 Vdc return source 2 Connect the gr
208. ipment DTE If it is set to NET this jack monitors the signal coming from the network February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Test Commands The test commands enable you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the DSU CSU and to test the front panel LEDs These tests can help you isolate areas of trouble if you are having problems with your DSU CSU To access all Test commands from the Test branch press F2 to select Test from the top level menu screen DSU ESF A Stat Test Cnfig 2 Remote Loopback Tests The Remote Loopback tests enable you to troubleshoot your circuit by sending the following to a far end device For Networks Line loopback up activation sequence for 10 seconds LLBUP m Line loopback down activation sequence for 10 seconds LLBDN For Channels m V 54 activation sequence to initiate a V 54 Loop 2 54UP m V 54 deactivation sequence to terminate a V 54 Loop 54DN m ANSI 71 403 Annex B activation sequence to initiate a on the remote device FT1UP m ANSI T1 403 Annex B deactivation sequence to terminate a on the remote device FT1DN You cannot perform remote loopbacks if any of the local loopbacks are active If you attempt to do so the error message Invld Test Combo Invalid Test Combination appears NOTE The following procedures are examples only Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the DSU CSU
209. it Clear Prev Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence Specifies the communication port s escape sequence Once the external device connection has been established either you or the DSU CSU can command the external device to disconnect Before doing so you may need to send the escape sequence out to switch the external device into command mode The escape sequence is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length If the escape sequence is NULL no escape sequence is sent out Edit Allows you to edit and or display the escape sequence using the generic text string entry screen Clear Allows you to clear the escape sequence The escape sequence is set to a null string NOTES This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is set to AT or the communication port is disabled February 2001 C 21 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 5 of 10 ComEscDel None Next None 0 25 0 45 0 6s 0 8s 1 05 Prev Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence Delay Specifies the delay used while sending the communication port escape sequence Use the communication port escape delay to specify the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and the delay after the last character of the escape sequence During the delay no data is sent out
210. k A LLBDN 54UP J A e Wes ies The Rem Loop screen appears Rem Loop Type xa Prti Prt2 Prt3 ey The 54UP 54DN FT1UP FT1DN commands send the requested sequence out the network interface on the DSO channels allocated to the port you select here 4 From the Rem Loop screen press the desired function key to select the specific port Use the scroll keys if necessary After you select a port the sequence is sent to the far end DSU CSU During this time Sending appears on Line 2 of the LCD followed by Command Complete when the sequence is complete During the Sending message you can press the 4 keys without affecting transmission of the loopback sequence 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 21 4 Maintenance Local Loopback Tests The Local Loopback tests enable you to conduct circuit testing and fault isolation for the digital line The supported local loopback tests are m Line Loopback LLB m Payload Loopback PLB m DTE Loopback DLB m Repeater Loopback RLB m Data Channel Loopback DCLB m Data Terminal Loopback DTLB NOTE DLB does not appear when the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled The Line Loopback command can be activated and deactivated in response to commands received over the network interface The Network Interface configuration option NET LLB controls whether the DSU CSU responds to the commands transmitt
211. l Port Table rs232PortOutSigNumber Object rs232PortEntry 4 This object contains the number of output signals contained in the output signal table This is the number of signals that can be asserted This number is 2 for the synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM AUX and COM ports General Port Table rs232PortInSpeed Object rs232PortEntry 5 This object contains the port s input speed in bits per second For the DSU CSU the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed object The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel configuration and cannot be changed through this object Thus for the synchronous data ports this object is read only The input speed of the MODEM AUX or COM port is the currently configured speed Setting of this value for the MODEM AUX or COM port causes the configured port speed to be changed General Port Table rs232PortOutSpeed Object rs232PortEntry 6 This object contains the port s output speed in bits per second For the DSU CSU the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed object The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel configuration and cannot be changed through this object Thus for the synchronous data ports this object is read only The input speed of the MODEM AUX or COM port is the currently configured speed Setting of this value for the MODEM AUX or COM
212. lity Data Link FDL is enabled Selecting Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps data link provided by FDL Running SNMP or Telnet over FDL requires an end to end FDL connection and cannot be terminated within the network Enab Enables the FDL management link for SNMP or Telnet Disab Disables the FDL management link NOTES This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF This configuration option is not available if EDL is enabled Ifthe local DSU CSU s FDL is enabled the remote DSU CSU s FDL must also be enabled C 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 3 Network Interface Configuration Options 2 of 3 NET LLB Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Network Initiated Line Loopback LLB Allows initiation and termination of the LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network or remote DSU CSU Enab Causes the DSU CSU to enter an LLB if the DSU CSU can perform an LLB in its current state and to cause an LLB Release command to terminate the LLB Disab Causes the DSU CSU to ignore LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands the DSU CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR 62411 NOTE When this configuration option is enabled the DSU CSU recognizes the in band LLB Actuate and LLB Release codes specified by AT amp T as well as the bit oriented FDL messages s
213. lted i e setting to dsx1SendNoCode m dsx1SendOtherTestPattern 8 Specifies that the network interface is sending a 1 in 8 test pattern The pattern is sent until the test is halted i e setting to dsx1SendNoCode February 2001 E 15 E SNMP MIB Objects Near End Group dsx1Circuitldentifier Object dsx1ConfigEntry 8 This object is only supported on the Net T1 Interface Near End Group dsx1LoopbackConfig Object dsx1ConfigEntry 9 This object specifies the loopback state of the T1 interfaces Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m dsxiNoLoop 1 The T1 interface is not in a loopback state m dsx1PayloadLoop 2 Specifies that a Payload Loopback PLB is active for the network interface or a Repeater Loopback RLB is active for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface m dsx1LineLoop 3 Specifies that a Line Loopback LLB is active for the network interface or a DTE Loopback DLB is active for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Near End Group dsx1LineStatus Object dsx1ConfigEntry 10 This object specifies the line alarm status of the T1 interfaces Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU More than one value may be active at a time m dsx1NoAlarm 1 No alarm present m dsx1RcvFarEndLOF 2 A yellow alarm signal is being received dsx1RcvAIS 8 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is being received m dsx1LossOfFrame 32 An
214. ly one route must be added to the NMS host 135 18 0 0 135 19 6 22 135 19 20 23 135 19 6 34 73s 135 19 20 45 73s A COM IP ADDRESS 135 18 40 4 LAN ADAPTER COM SUBNET MASK FF FF 00 00 135 18 40 1 SUBNET 135 18 40 0 SUBNET 135 19 0 0 496 14648 02 Figure F 4 Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers an Alternative 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 F 5 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios Scenario 5 Figure F 5 Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs illustrates multiple COM ports on the same carrier connected to different NMSs This might be used in service provider applications where some of the carrier s circuit cards and their remotes are managed by one NMS and other cards are managed by a different NMS In this example each card and remote is on a separate subnet Also note that each LAN Adapter connection is on a different subnet The subnet mask is FF FF FF 00 The NMS hosts would only need routes added for the subnets that they are to manage SUBNET 135 18 23 0 SUBNET 135 18 34 0 135 18 23 2 135 18 34 2 COM IP_ GEH ADDRESS 135 140 22 95 LO 135 18 40 5 LAN LAN ADAPTER ADAPTER 135 140 22 79 135 18 40 1 ETHERNET ETHERNET SUBNET 135 140 22 0 SUBNET 135 18 40 0 496 14649 02 Figure F 5 Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs F 6 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Front Panel Emulation Overvie
215. make selections from the choices presented on the second line of the LCD When this line presents choices it is generally divided into three sections each displayed directly above one of the Function keys When your choice appears above one of the Function keys press that key to select that choice February 2001 3 3 3 Operation Test Jacks The scroll keys lt 1 and gt serve one of two functions depending on whether a menu screen or a data entry screen appears on the front panel For data entry screens the lt key scrolls one character to the left while the gt key scrolls one character to the right For menu screens the lt key scrolls to the previous menu choice while the gt key scrolls to the next menu choice If a choice is available to the left of the screen the character lt appears on the top line If a choice is available to the right of the screen the character appears on the top line If choices are available to both the right and the left of the screen two arrows appear The arrows indicate that you must use the scroll keys to bring the additional options onto the screen Test jacks are located on the DSU CSU front panel Figure 3 4 Test Jacks Standalone DSU CSU These are described in Test Jacks in Chapter 4 Maintenance The 3165 provides only the Network Monitor In and Network Monitor Out test jacks ET EGPT N In In In Out Out Out 496 14808
216. mber from 1 to 4 You cannot modify this value on this screen for this port only Nn This DSO channel is allocated to the network interface DSO channel n where n is a number from 1 to 24 You cannot modify this value on this screen Dn This DSO channel is allocated to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface DSO channel n where n is a number from 1 to 24 You can modify this value on this screen Select the channel by pressing the Function key under that number To deallocate a port press the Function key under that port number Pressing the Function key under channels assigned to other ports has no effect NOTES The DSU CSU automatically derives the data rate for the port from the number of DSO channels allocated Forthe 3164 DSU CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps If a selection of Prtn causes this limit to be exceeded the selection is ignored and the continues to be displayed for the channel February 2001 C 15 C Configuration Options General Configuration Options C 16 Table C 6 General Configuration Options 1 of 2 Gen Yellow Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Generate Yellow Alarm Signals Determines whether the DSU CSU generates Yellow Alarm signals on the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces NOTE This configuration option is n
217. mbers 0 9 m The lowercase letters a z m The uppercase letters A Z The space character m The ASCII symbols in ascending order based on the ASCII code m The End Of Line EOL symbol lt m The caret control character is used to select non printable ASCII characters The caret must be followed by one character which together form the control sequence Table 3 7 Control Sequence defines all of the available control sequences 3 62 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Table 3 7 Control Sequence Sequence ASCII HEX A or a SOH 0x01 B or b STX 0x02 C or c ETX 0x03 D or d EOT 0x04 E or e ENQ 0x05 F or f ACK 0x06 G or g BEL 0x07 H or h BS 0x08 or i HT 0x09 J or j LF or NL 0x0A K or k VT 0x0B L or l FF or NP 0x0C M or m CR 0x0D N or n SO OxOE O or o SI OxOF P or p DLE 0x10 Q or q DC1 0x11 R or r DC2 0x12 S or s DC3 0x13 T or t DC4 0x14 U or u NAK 0x15 V or v SYN 0x16 W or w ETB 0x17 X or x CAN 0x18 Y or y EM 0x19 AZ or z SUB Ox1A t ESC Ox1B FS 0 1 GS 0x1D NA RS 0x1E US Ox1F February 2001 3 63 3 Operation Deactivating the Alarm Relay for Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs The Alarm Cut off command forces a deactivation of the alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier during an alarm
218. messages for the DSU CSU Table 4 2 Device Health and Status Messages lists these messages in priority order p Procedure To display device health and status 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat 2 From the Status screen select DevHS Status a DevHS STest Perf lies WM Alarm status messages appear on Line 2 of the LCD in priority order highest to lowest The DSU CSU is polled for current status every ten seconds If the status has changed from the last poll the Health and Status screen is updated and the highest priority message is displayed 3 Use the scroll keys if necessary to scroll additional device health and status messages onto the LCD Device H S 7 A Eni A GC e 8 GJ The Auto Device Health and Status screen appears when there is no activity no keys pressed on the active physical interface for five minutes Only the highest priority message appears on Line 2 of the LCD Auto Dev H S A bs at DTE x se pee ipe 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 3 4 Maintenance 4 4 Table 4 2 Device Health and Status Messages 1 of 2 Message Description LOS at Net A Loss Of Signal condition 175 consecutive zeros has been detected on the network interface The condition is cleared when the density of ones to zeros received is 12 5 LOS at DTE A Loss Of Signal condition 175 consecutive zeros has b
219. n If you respond No the system exits without saving the changes If you respond Yes you are prompted to specify where the changes should be saved main config save Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx SAVE CONFIGURATION TO Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Figure H 7 Configuration Save Screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 11 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Establishing Access Security on a Port Although the password feature is available it is not required If used it ensures access security before control is passed to a device connected to a port The following procedure is an example only It shows how to enable the password for the communication port Passwords can also be enabled for the internal modem and for Telnet sessions gt Procedure To establish access security on the communication port 1 7 From the Main Menu screen select Configuration The Load Configuration From screen appears From the Load Configuration From screen select Current The Configuration Edit Display screen appears From the Configuration Edit Display screen select User Interface The User Interface Options screen appears From the User Interface Options screen select Communication Port The Communication Port Options screen appears Inthe Password Required field enter Enable Figure H 8 Enabling
220. n Assignments D 12 Table D 9 V 35 Cable Interface Signal ITU T Number Direction Pin Shield z A Signal Common 102 Transmitted Data 103 To DSU CSU P A S B Received Data 104 From DSU CSU R A T B Request to Send 105 To DSU CSU Clear to Send 106 From DSU CSU Data Channel Received 109 From DSU CSU F Line Signal Detector Data Set Ready 107 From DSU CSU E Data Terminal Ready 108 1 2 To DSU CSU H Transmit Signal Element 113 To DSU CSU U A Timing DTE Source W B Transmit Signal Element 114 From DSU CSU Y A Timing DCE Source AA B Receiver Signal 115 From DSU CSU V A Element Timing DCE X B Source Local Loopback 141 To DSU CSU L Loopback Maintenance 140 To DSU CSU N Test Indicator 142 From DSU CSU NN February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments EIA 530 A to X 21 Cable Interface The EIA 530 A to X 21 adapter Figure D 9 EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter provides the X 21 interface shown in Table D 10 X 21 Cable Interface 530 SIGNAL TD A TD B RD A RD B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B RLSD A RLSD B SIG COMMON TT A TT B DB15 X21 SOCKET SIGNAL TD A TD B RD A RD B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B RLSD A RLSD B SIG COMMON TT A TT B 495 14787 Figure D 9 EIA 530 A to X 21 Adapter Table D 10 X 21 Cable Interface Signal ITU T
221. n Bold Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Net DCLB Disab V 54 FT1 Both Port LB Disab DTLB DCLB Both All Ones Disab DTR RTS Both Rcv Yellow None Halt Tx Clock Int Ext InvertTxC Enab Disab InvrtData Enab Disab EDL Enab Disab Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near end Disab Maint Send Both Far end Disab Maint Mgmt Link Enab Disab February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 Network Interface C Configuration Options Network Channel Allocation 1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 8 9 10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Allocations N1 N24 indicates allocation to DTE Drop Insert channels February 2001 C 47 C Configuration Options C 48 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface DTE DSX 1 Channel Allocation D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 Allocations D1 D24 indicates allocation to network channels February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options DTE Chan Config Assign N1 24 Voice RBS or Data
222. n Options 4 of 7 NetMask Next Edit Clear Prev Subnet Mask for the DSU CSU Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the DSU CSU Since this subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via the FDL or EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs management link Edit Allows you to edit and or display the subnet mask for the DSU CSU Clear Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the DSU CSU The subnet mask is set to 000 000 000 000 If the subnet mask is 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Com IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev Com Port IP Address Specifies the IP address for the communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy Edit Allows you to edit or display the IP address for the communication port Clear Allows you to clear the IP address for the communication port The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 NOTE This configuration option is not available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs if the communication port is disabled Com NetMask Next Edit Clear Prev Subnet Mask for the Communication Port Specifies the subnet mask for the communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy Edit Allows you to edit and or display the subnet mask for the communication por
223. n To Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Chan gt Display Set Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1Fracifindex for DTE or Net T1 Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Chan gt Prtn gt Port Rate Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for port n Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Gen gt Clock Src Display dsx1TransmitClockSource for DTE T1 or NET T1 Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt Com Rate Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt Aux Rate Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt Modem Rate Set Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for COM AUX or MODEM port Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt Char Length Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt MChar Len Set Display rs232AyncPortBits for COM or MODEM port Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt CParity Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt MParity Set Display rs232AyncPortParity for COM or MODEM port Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt CStop Bits Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt User gt MStop Bits Set Display rs232AyncPortStopBits for COM or MODEM port 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 31 E SNMP MIB Objects E 32 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 IP Network Addressing Scenarios Overview This appendix describes a means of configuring 31xx Series devices in an Internet Protocol IP network to provide SNMP or Telnet connectivity Since there are many possible network addressing s
224. n User Alarm Mgmt a J Copy Pri Pr2 Pris Gen Trap B Port Select Al Prti Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Dsply Clear DTE Prti Prt2 Prt3 Pri4 L n A For Carrier Mounted DSU CSUs only For Standalone DSU CSUs only 496 14945 W For 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs only E 28 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Table E 1 SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross Reference 1 of 3 Front Panel Command SNMP MIB Object Stat gt DevHS LOS at NET OOF at NET Yellow at NET AIS at NET EER at NET Read the dsx1LineStatus object for NET T1 dsx1LossOfSignal dsx1LossOfFrame dsx1RcvFarEnd dsx1RevAlS dsx1OtherFailure Stat DevHS LOS at DTE OOF at DTE Yellow at DTE AIS at DTE Read the dsx1LineStatus object for DTE T1 dsx1LossOfSignal dsx1LossOfFrame dsx1RcvFarEnd dsx1RevAlS Stat gt Perf gt Telco gt Cur CurTimer ES UAS SES BES CSS Read the value in the following objects for NET T1 dsx1TimeElapsed dsx1CurrentES dsx1CurrentuAS dsx1CurrentSES dsx1CurrentBES dsx1CurrentCSS Stat gt Perf gt Telco gt Intvl gt Dsply Select the interval number with dsx1IntervalNumber Read the value in the following objects for NET T1 dsx1IntervalES DCLB on Port n DTLB on Port n 1 8 Test Active QRSS Test Active QRSS on Port n 511 Port n Monitoring QRSS Mon QRSS Port n Mon511 Port n pU dsx1In
225. n response to a reset command Request for Comments One of the documents published by the Internet Engineering Task Force that describe Internet protocols and policies Routing Information Protocol A protocol for exchanging routing information An 8 position modular connector Repeater LoopBack Loops the signal being sent to the network back to the DTE Drop Insert and data ports after it has passed through the framing circuitry of the device Remote Loopback branch of the DSU CSU menu tree A device that connects LANs by dynamically routing data according to destination and available routes An Electronic Industries Association s standard for a low speed 25 position DCE DTE interface RFC 1659 which defines objects for managing RS 232 type interfaces e g RS 422 RS 423 etc and supports synchronous data ports and management communication ports on the device An Electronic Industries Association s standard for a general purpose 37 position DCE DTE interface Request to Send A signal from the DTE to the device indicating that the DTE has data to send V 24 circuit 105 Receive To obtain transmitted signals Receive Clock V 24 circuit 115 Received Data Pin 3 of the EIA 232 interface that is used by the DTE to receive data from the modem Conversely the modem uses Pin 3 to transmit data to the DTE Shared Diagnostic Control Panel A feature that allows carrier mounted devices to share the same diagnostic control
226. ne company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 D 6 If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact your sales or service representative as appropriate for repair or warranty information If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Telephone Call our automated response system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved 7 The equipment s modem cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information 8 FCC compliant telephone line cords with modular plugs are provided with this equipm
227. net session disconnects due to inactivity The TnInActTm configuration option must be set to Enab Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change Use the Function keys Up or Down to increment or decrement the digit Up Increments the time delay Down Decrements the time delay Save Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 27 C Configuration Options Alarm Configuration Options NOTE A triangular symbol identifies a configuration option that is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUS only Table C 8 Alarm Configuration Options 1 of 4 Alrm Msg Disab Next Disab Modem Com Both Prev Alarm Messages Controls the generation of alarm messages which are routed to an ASCII terminal or printer attached to the communication port and or the modem port Disab Prevents an alarm message for any alarm conditions Modem Enables alarm messages routed to the modem port This selection does not appear on carrier mounted DSU CSUs Com Enables alarm messages routed to the communication port Both Enables alarm messages routed to both the modem and communication ports This selection does not appear on carrier mounted DSU CSUs NOTE Alarm messages are only sent to the communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to ASCII otherwise the alarm messages are discarded SNMP Trap Disab N
228. nfiguration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Aux Rate 19 2 Next 9 6 14 4 19 2 38 4 Prev Auxiliary Port Rate Configures the bit rate for the auxiliary port 9 6 Configures the auxiliary port rate as 9600 bps 14 4 Configures the auxiliary port rate as 14 400 bps 19 2 Configures the auxiliary port rate as 19 200 bps 38 4 Configures the auxiliary port rate as 38 400 bps NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUS only February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 10 of 10 Telnet Session Enable Specifies whether the DSU CSU responds to Telnet session requests Enab The DSU CSU responds to Telnet session requests Disab The DSU CSU does not respond to Telnet session requests Telnet Password Mode Specifies whether a password is required for Telnet access Enab A password is required for Telnet access Disab A password is not required for Telnet access Telnet Inactivity Timeout Specifies whether the Telnet session disconnects after a period of inactivity specified by the TnDiscTm configuration option Enab The Telnet session disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the TnDiscTm configuration option Disab The Telnet session does not disconnect due to inactivity Telnet Disconnect Time Specifies the period of time 1 to 60 minutes before the Tel
229. ng the lt 4 or gt key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three Line 2 displays whether the DSO channel in Line 1 is a data channel Data or a voice RBS channel Each time that you press the Function key located below the desired channel the display in Line 2 toggles between Data and RBS D1 D2 A RBS RBS RBS 2 6 e C Clearing DSO Channel Allocation You can clear deallocate all the DSO channels currently allocated to either the network interface the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or the synchronous data ports p Procedure To clear DSO channel allocation 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Chan selection appears on the screen 5 Select Chan Edit A Port 6 From the Channel Config screen select Clear Channel Config A Dsply Clear DTE 2 Gc J Be 3 3 44 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 7 From the Clear Channel screen select NET to clear all DSO channels assigned to the network interface Or select DTE to clear all DSO channels assigned to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Or select a port to clear all assignments for that data port Clear Chann
230. no dial tone connected properly Busy Signal The modem is receiving a busy Redial the phone number later signal No Answer Tone The remote end does not Redial the phone number later answer within 45 seconds Modem In Use The modem is in use Redial the phone number later 4 16 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Test Jacks 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance For 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS six test jacks are located on the front panel Figure 4 1 Test Jacks Standalone DSU CSU The Mon Monitor branch of the menu tree allows you to select either EQPT Equipment or NET Network The 2 port and 4 port DSU CSU test jack functions are shown in Figure 4 2 Test Jack Block Diagram and described in Table 4 7 Test Jack Functions ET EQPT N In In In Out Out Out 496 14808 Figure 4 1 Test Jacks Standalone DSU CSU gt Procedure To change the Mon Monitor selection in 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs 1 From the top level menu press the gt gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen press the key until the Mon selection appears on the screen 4 Select Mon Control A Passwd Mon SAS 5 From the Mon Jack screen press F1 to select EQPT the default or press F2 to select NET Mon Jack EQPT 25 A Gm e CJ February 2001 4 17 4 Maintenance TERMINAL E
231. nt Value Default in Bold Port Type Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Port Base Rate Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Transmit Clock Source Tx Clock Internal External Invert Transmit Clock InvertTxC Enable Disable Invert Transmit and InvrtData Enable Disable Received Data Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones Disable DTR RTS Both Not Ready Action on Network Yellow Rev Yellow None Halt Alarm Network Init Data Channel Net DCLB Disable V 54 FT1 Both Loopback Port DTE Initiated Port LB Disable DTLB DCLB Both Loopbacks Embedded Data Link EDL Enable Disable EDL Management Link Mgmt Link Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Err Rate 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 Threshold 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Near End Performance Near end Disable Maintain Send Statistics Both Far End Performance Far end Disable Maintain Statistics February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Sync Data Port Options Port 2 Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Port Type Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Port Base Rate Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Transmit Clock Source Tx Clock Internal External Invert Transmit Clock InvertTxC Enable Disable Invert Transmit and InvrtData Enable Disable Received Data Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones Disable DTR RTS Both Not Ready Action on Network Yellow Rev Yellow None Halt Alarm Network Init Data Chann
232. o edit or display the IP address for the modem port Clear Allows you to clear the IP address for the modem port The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Mdm NetMask Next Edit Clear Prev Subnet Mask for the Modem Port Specifies the Subnet Mask for the modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt Edit Allows you to edit and or display the Subnet Mask for the modem port Clear Allows you to clear the Subnet Mask for the modem port The Subnet Mask is set to 000 000 000 000 If the Subnet Mask is 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Alt Mdm IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev Alternate Modem Port IP Address Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt This IP address is needed if a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm trap phone number contained in the alarm directory and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another phone number Edit Allows you to edit or display the alternate IP address for the modem port Clear Allows you to clear the alternate IP address for the modem port The IP address is set to 0
233. ocol LCP W Active negotiation of LCP when the connection is established m Maximum Request Unit MRU sizes up to 1500 bytes but the DSU CSU will attempt to negotiate down to 500 bytes m The DSU CSU provides a unique LCP magic number derived from the unit serial number and the elapsed time m Full negotiation of escape characters The DSU CSU implementation of PPP does not support Link Quality Reports LQR compression encryption Password Authentication Protocol PAP or Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP The DSU CSU implementation of SLIP supports a fixed MRU size of 1006 bytes Before selecting the protocol you must first select the port to be used as the communications link Refer to Selecting the Port on page 3 20 This example assumes that the COM port is being used as the communications link gt Procedure To select the link layer protocol 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Mgmt selection appears on the screen February 2001 3 23 3 Operation 5 Select Mgmt Edit A User Alarm Mgmt 2 eJ le 6 From the Mgmt Config screen select Gen Mgmt Config Hes cC 7 Press F1 Next until th
234. of 0 0 0 0 is considered a default route This object may not take a Multicast Class D address value Any assignment implicit or otherwise of an instance of this object to a value x must be rejected if the bitwise logical AND of x with the value of the corresponding instance of the ipForwardMask object is not equal to x IP Group ipRoutelflndex Object ipRouteEntry 1 When the routing table is displayed the ipRoutelflndex object for some entries may have a value greater than ifNumber In these cases the ipRoutelflndex refers to a proprietary interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group of MIB II Route entries with an unrecognized ipRoutelflndex value should not be deleted When setting this object via SNMP the ipRoutelflndex value can only assume an appropriate value of iflndex defined for the particular device type IP Group ipRouteMetric2 Object ipRouteEntry 4 The following values are displayed for the ipRouteMetric2 object For a carrier device designated as the IP Bus Master ipRouteMetric2 is used to designate the slot number of the next hop associated with this route if the destination is not connected to the device For carrier devices not designated as the IP Bus Master or IP Bus Master devices in which the destination is connected to the device ipRouteMetric2 contains the slot number 0 15 of the carrier device For standalone devices ipRouteMetric2 is not used and contains
235. om the PC open Program Manager from Windows 2 Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears after the Front Panel Emulation program is installed on the PC The Front Panel window opens Program Manager File Options Window Help Front Panel i l nnn R RBR nnn Main Games Windows ApeNon Windows Aps Accessories 3 Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears in the Front Panel window The Front Panel Emulation screen appears 4 Enter the Com Port and Speed from the drop down selection list boxes Front Panel Emulation Options Help cam Por n Settings Com Port COM2 Speed 19200 Connection Type Remote s Transparent ba The Com Port field needs to contain the actual communications port name as recorded in the Windows information file INI The Speed field needs to contain one of the following communications speeds 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 or 38400 and should match the DSU CSU s COM port configuration 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 G 3 G Front Panel Emulation 5 Choose either a Local for near end DSU CSU or Remote for far end DSU CSU destination 6 If you chose a Local destination click on the Execute button If you chose a Remote destination enter the telephone number of the far end DSU CSU in the Phone Number field then click on
236. on Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 2 of 7 NMS Manager n Access Type Specifies the allowable type of access for an SNMP manager attempting to access the DSU CSU s MIB using community name 1 The manager number n is specified by the Num Sec Mgrs configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get to the accessible objects in the MIB for this device when community name 1 is used This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs R W Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set to the objects in the MIB for this device when community name 1 is used Write access is allowed for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either read only or read write System Name Specifies the system name for this unit This is the name of this SNMP managed node Edit Allows you to edit or display the system name Clear Allows you to clear the system name System Location Specifies the system location for this unit This is the physical location of this SNMP managed node Edit Allows you to edit or display the system location Clear Allows you to clear the system location System Contact Specifies the system contact person for this unit and how to contact this person Edit Allows you to edit or display the system contact Clear Allows
237. on Options 3 of 4 AltDialDir None Next None 1 2 3 4 5 Prev Alternate Dial Out Directory for Alarm or Trap Specifies whether a call that cannot be completed busy no answer etc is retried using an alternate phone number This affects calls that are initiated in an attempt to send an alarm or trap message to the modem port or carrier external communication port device The alternate phone number to try is contained in one of the five call directories If call retry is enabled the initial call is retried at the original number once before a call attempt to the alternate number is tried If the call to the alternate number is unsuccessful it is also retried once The alternate dial out option applies to each alarm trap event Once a call for an alarm trap message either completes or fails all retry attempts the next alarm trap attempts to establish a call to the phone number contained in the alarm directory None Specifies that alternate alarm dial out is not performed if a call cannot be completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory 1 5 Specifies the call directory that contains the phone number to call if a call cannot be completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory NOTE For carrier mounted DSU CSUS this configuration option is only available if the communication port is enabled for an external device Err Rate 10E 4 Next 10E 4 10 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Prev Ex
238. onfigures the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 for the communication port NOTE This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for synchronous operation Ignore DTR No Next Yes No Prev Communication Port Ignore DTR State Specifies whether the DSU CSU ignores the state of the Data Terminal Ready DTR input to the communication port Yes DTR is ignored No DTR is not ignored NOTE This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for synchronous operation CminActTm Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Communication Port Inactivity Timeout Specifies whether the communication port disconnects after a period of inactivity specified by the CmDiscTm configuration option Enab The communication port disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the CmDiscTm configuration option Disab The communication port does not disconnect due to inactivity CmDiscTm 5 Next Up Down Save Prev Communication Port Disconnect Time Specifies the period of time 1 to 60 minutes before the communication port disconnects due to inactivity The configuration option must be set to Enab Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change Use the Function keys Up or Down to increment or decrement the digit Up Increments the time delay Down Decrements the time delay Save
239. or Model 3164 and 3165 DSU CSUs Signal Direction Pin Number DTE Transmit Clock From DSU CSU 15 DTE Receive Data To DSU CSU 3 Signal Ground 7 DTE Transmit Data From DSU CSU 2 DTE Receive Clock From DSU CSU 17 February 2001 D Pin Assignments COM Port Interface The COM port connects to a PC for front panel emulation to an ASCII terminal or printer for alarms to an async terminal to a network device e g a router for SNMP or Telnet applications to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet applications or to another DSU CSU s AUX port for daisy chain connectivity The SNMP LAN Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the DSU CSU The COM port connector is an 8 position keyed modular connector Table D 6 COM Port Connector The data signals on this port are referenced to a DTE interface The COM port to PC cable is shown in Figure D 5 COM Port to PC Cable and the COM port to terminal printer cable is shown in Figure D 6 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable NOTE For daisy chaining an AUX port to a COM port a 25 pin to 8 pin cable is required and the appropriate configuration options Com Use and Aux Use must be set to Daisy Whenever the cable is connected or disconnected you should change the Daisy selection to ensure that the correct parameters have been negotiated for the link layer Table D 6 COM Port Connector Signal Direction Pin
240. ore than 9 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period It is cleared with less than 10 errors in sixty seconds 10E 8 10E 8 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if more than 41 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals It is cleared with less than 42 errors in three 15 minute intervals 10E 9 10E 9 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if more than 4 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals It is cleared with less than 5 errors in three 15 minute intervals NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 2 Port Configuration Options 5 of 5 Near end Disab Next Disab Maint Send Both Prev Near End Performance Statistics Specifies whether the DSU CSU maintains near end performance statistics and sends performance report messages PRMs for a particular port Disab Disables near end performance statistics and does not send PRMs Maint Maintains near end performance statistics for this port Send Sends PRMs over the port s EDL every second Each PRM contains the performance statistics for the previous 4 seconds Both Maintains near end performance statistics and sends PRMs over the port s EDL NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4
241. ored by the LED command This command is most useful when the DSU CSU is being accessed remotely see Appendix G Front Panel Emulation When using Front Panel Emulation no LEDs are shown on the PC s screen you must use the Stat command procedure described below to get LED information NOTE The following procedure is an example only Screen displays may vary depending on the model of the DSU CSU p Procedure To display LED conditions on the front panel screen 1 From the top level menu screen select Stat 2 From the Status screen press the gt gt key until the LED selection appears on the screen 3 From the Status screen select LED Status A Perf TStat LED A cJ J a 4 From the Select LEDs screen press the Function key that corresponds to T1 interface or the data port for which you want to display LEDs Use the scroll keys if necessary Select LEDs a Im Prti Pr2 A es pe pe pe ee If you chose T1 the LED Display screen lists the LED signals two at a time on the second line A vertical bar at the left of the LED name indicates the condition is ON while an underscore indicates the condition is Off LED Display j Zs Test NetSig A 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 13 3 Operation If you chose a port the Port n LEDs screen lists the LED signals two at a time on the second line A vertical bar at the left of
242. ort Table rs232AsyncPortAutoBaud rs232AsyncPortEntry 5 This object specifies the ability to automatically sense the input speed of the port Only the following value is supported by the DSU CSU m disabled 2 Autobaud is not supported E 22 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Synchronous Port Table RS 232 like MIB The synchronous port table contains an entry for each of the synchronous data ports and the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for synchronous operation For the DSU CSU the entries in the table that are counters rs232SyncPortEntry 3 7 are used to collect statistics and are not supported Synchronous Port Table rs232SyncPortClockSource rs232SyncPortEntry 2 This object specifies the clock source for the port Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m internal 1 The port uses an internal clock m external 2 The port uses an external clock Input Signal Table RS 232 like MIB This table contains entries for the input signals that can be detected by the unit for each of the synchronous data ports Input Signal Table rs232InSigName rs232InSigEntry 2 This object contains the identification of a hardware input signal Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m rts 1 Request To Send m ditr 4 Data Terminal Ready Input Signal Table rs232InSigState rs232InSigEntry 3 This object contains t
243. ot available for 1 port DSU CSUS or if the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface is disabled If the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled the DSU CSU always generates the Yellow Alarm signal on the network interface Enab Generates the Yellow Alarm signal for both the network and DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces Disab Disables the Yellow Alarm signal When this configuration option is disabled Yellow Alarm conditions on the network interface cause an AIS signal to be transmitted on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface NOTE When this configuration option is disabled the DTE equipment connected to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is responsible for generation of the Yellow Alarm signal on the network interface In this case the interface port marked DTE must only be connected to an FCC Part 68 Registered for USA and Canadian DOC Certified for Canada Digital Service Unit or System such as PBX with a DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Failure to do so is a violation of FCC Rules or DOC Regulations Clock Src NET Next NET DTE Prti Int Ext Prev DSU CSU Clock Source Specifies the master clock source for the DSU CSU This selection synchronizes all internal timing and external interface clocks The clock rate s for the external timing interfaces are independent of the input rate for the master clock Failure of the clock specified by the Clock Source selection results in automatic fallback to internal clock
244. panel A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a reset is initiated February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 server SES Set Command SNMP SF SLIP SNMP Stat branch StEvnt subnet subnet mask synchronous data T1 TCP IP Telnet time slot trap SNMP TStat branch TX TXC TXD UAS UDP UL V 24 3160 A2 GB21 90 Glossary A device that offers a specific service such as database management to a client Severely Errored Seconds Usually defined as a second during which a specific number of CRC errors was exceeded or an OOF or other critical error occurred A command providing write access to SNMP MIB objects Superframe Also known as D4 framing the T1 transmission standard that specifies 12 frames to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits Serial Line Internet Protocol Protocol for serial operation on an internet Simple Network Management Protocol Protocol for open networking management Status branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Status Event Register Records the occurrence of certain alarm conditions A portion of a network which may be a physically independent network segment that shares a network address with other portions of the network and is distinguished by a subnet number A subnet is to a network what a network is to an internet A number that identifies the subnet portion of a network address The subnet mask is a
245. pears STest Health A Passed GJ m 1 el be Table 4 1 Self Test Health Messages Message Description Passed No problems were found during power up CPU fail The central processing unit failed internal testing Device fail One or more of the unit s integrated circuit chips failed to pass internal device level testing B8ZS LOS fail The unit failed to encode data properly or to detect Loss Of Signal Alarm fail The unit failed to transmit AIS or to detect an Yellow alarm Memory fail The unit failed program checksum verification LCD fail The front panel liquid crystal display LCD failed NET 1 fail The unit failed to internally loop data on the network T1 circuit 1 fail The unit failed to internally loop data on the DTE 1 DSX 1 circuit DSU fail The unit failed to internally loop data on the DSU DSU Portn fail Port s integrated circuitry failed to pass device internal testing Modem fail Unit failed to internally loop data through the modem circuit Unknown Exp Dev The unit is not able to recognize the expansion device connected to the main circuit card Failure An 8 digit hexadecimal failure code is provided for service personnel February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Device Health and Status Use the Device Health and Status branch to view the current health and status
246. pecified by ANSI for ESF only NET PLB Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Network Initiated Payload Loopback PLB Allows initiation and termination of the PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network or remote DSU CSU Enab Causes the DSU CSU to enter a PLB if the DSU CSU can perform a PLB in its current state and to cause a PLB Release command to terminate the PLB Disab Causes the DSU CSU to ignore PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands the DSU CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR 54016 NOTES When this configuration option is enabled the DSU CSU recognizes the in band PLB Actuate and PLB Release codes specified by AT amp T as well as the bit oriented FDL messages specified by ANSI This configuration option is only available when the network interface framing is set to ESF Bit Stuff 62411 Next 62411 Part68 Disab Prev Bit Stuffing Determines when bit stuffing is performed to meet the ones density requirements for data transmission on the network You must choose the maximum number of consecutive zeros the DSU CSU can receive before it inserts a one 62411 Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 15 consecutive zeros or when the density of ones falls below 12 596 complies with AT amp T TR 62411 Part68 Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 80 consecutive zeros complies with FCC Pa
247. port DSU CSUs copying the configuration options from that port to another port or to all ports NOTE The following procedure is an example only Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the DSU CSU p Procedure To select a specific port to configure 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen select Port Edit A DTE Port NET A 1 Bt amp 5 From the Port Select screen press the Function key that corresponds to the port you want to configure Use the C gt key to scroll addition ports onto the screen if necessary Configure the port see Appendix C Configuration Options Port Select A Copy Prti Prt2 A 2 e 3 18 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation p Procedure To copy the configuration options to one or all ports 1 From the Port Select screen select Copy Port Select A Copy Prti Prt2 A 2 Select the port from which you want to copy the configuration options using the corresponding Function key Copy From 25 Es 2 Paj 2 8 8 8 3 Select the port to which you want to copy the configuration options using the corresponding Function key Or press F
248. port causes the configured port speed to be changed 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 21 E SNMP MIB Objects Asynchronous Port Table RS 232 like MIB The asynchronous port table contains an entry for the MODEM AUX or COM port when the port is configured for asynchronous operation For the DSU CSU the entries in the table that are counters rs232AsyncPortEntry 6 8 are used to collect statistics and are not supported Asynchronous Port Table rs232AsyncPortBits rs232AsyncPortEntry 2 This object specifies the number of bits in a character Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU 7 7 bit characters Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only 8 8 bit characters Asynchronous Port Table rs232AsyncPortStopBits rs232AsyncPortEntry 3 This object specifies the number of stop bits supported Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m one 1 stop bit m two 2 Two stop bits Supported on the COM MODEM ports only m one and half 3 One and a half stop bits Supported on the COM port only Asynchronous Port Table rs232AsyncPortParity rs232AsyncPortEntry 4 This object specifies the parity used by the port Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m none 1 No parity bit m odd 2 Odd parity Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only even 3 Even parity Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only Asynchronous P
249. r DTE Prti Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 NOTE The configuration options described in this table are made available by selecting Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 or Prt4 from the Channel Config screen Table C 4 DTE Channel Configuration Options describes the DTE configuration options For information about the operation of Display and Clear refer to Configuring DSO Channels in Chapter 3 Operation Data Port Channel Allows the assignment of a particular port to DSO channels on either the network interface the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or another port see the Assign To configuration option below NOTE For 2 port DSU CSUS only Ports 1 and 2 are available for 1 port DSU CSUS only Port 1 is available and only the Port Rate configuration option appears if you select this port Assign To NET Next NET DTE Prtn Prtn Prtn Prev Data Port Channel Allocation Destination Allows you to assign this port to DSO channels on either the network interface the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or another port NET Assigns this port to DSO channels on the network interface DTE Assigns this port to DSO channels on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface If the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface is disabled this selection does not appear Prtn Assigns this port to another port where n is the port number of all available ports except the port selected from the Channel Config screen For example if you select Prt1 from the Channel Config screen
250. r interface e g T1 Port or External is being used as the transmit clock Near End Group dsx1Fdl Object dsx1ConfigEntry 13 This object specifies how Facility Data Link is being used Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU More than one value may be active at a time m dsxlother 1 SNMP data is being sent over FDL m dsx1Ansi T1 403 2 ANSI PRMs are supported on the network interface as specified by ANSI T1 403 m dsx1Att 54016 4 FDL supports the requirements specified by AT amp T publication TR54016 m dsx1Fdl none 8 Indicates that the device does not use FDL This is the only value that applies to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Near End Group The DS1 Current Table Objects dsx1CurrentEntry The following DS1 current table objects are provided for the network interface only Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error status if access is attempted m dsx1Currentindex The index that identifies the T1 interface m dsx1CurrentESs Errored Seconds for the current interval m dsx1Current SESs Severely Errored Seconds for the current interval m dsx1CurrentUASs Unavailable Seconds for the current interval m dsx1CurrentCSSs Controlled Slip Seconds for the current interval m dsx1CurrentBESs Bursty Errored Seconds for the current interval 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 17 E SNMP MIB Objects Near End Group
251. r options use the Next and Previous selections to scroll forward and backward through the group of options 3 16 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Framing ESF A Next D4 ESF A Eu ERE 5 Press the appropriate Function key to choose another value Use the scroll keys if necessary 6 Use the Save procedure to save your changes to the Active or Customer area Saving Edit Changes Save edit changes to the Active area when you want those changes to take effect immediately Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future use NOTE If you attempt to exit the Edit function after making changes without performing a Save the DSU CSU prompts you with Save Options Choose Yes or No B gt Procedure To save edit changes 1 From the Choose Funct screen one level above the Edit screen two levels below the top level menu screen select Save Choose Funct A Edit Save PAS J 53 5 03 2 Choose whether you want to save to the Active Customer 1 or Customer 2 area Use the scroll keys if necessary Save Edit to li A Activ Cust1 A 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 17 3 Operation Selecting Copying to a Specific Port For the DSU CSU you have the capability of selecting a specific port to configure and then for 2 port and 4
252. rd 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen press the gt key until the Passwd selection appears on the screen 4 Select Passwd Control mi a Reset CID Passwd A J e Bg eo 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 49 3 Operation 5 Use the lt and gt keys to position the cursor under the desired character You must enter a character before the gt moves the cursor to the next space to the right Passwd XXxxxxxx A Up Down Save 2 EB a Enter the desired password Press 1 Up and F2 Down to scroll up down through the valid characters numbers for the password Valid password characters are 0 9 a z A Z and Press F3 Save to save the password Passwd Xxxxxxxx A Up Down Save x eJ e Bo Entering a Password to Gain Access 3 50 You are prompted to enter a password up to 8 characters when you are accessing a port whose Password configuration option is set refer to the previous section Setting a Password on page 3 49 Valid password characters are 0 9 a z A Z and The existing password is not shown on the screen An underscore in the first position shows where to enter the first character If the password is set to all null characters default value press Done when t
253. re cleared The following alarm conditions activate the alarm relay if this configuration option is enabled Continuous Loss of Signal LOS or Out of Frame OOF at the network or Drop Insert DSX 1 interface m Continuous Out of Frame OOF at any synchronous data port that has the Embedded Data Link enabled m Alarm Indication Signal AIS received at either the network or DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface m Yellow alarm signal received at either the network or DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface m Excessive Error Rate EER detected at the network interface m An Excessive Error Rate EER detected at any synchronous data port that has the Embedded Data Link enabled NOTE This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUSs only A February 2001 C 31 C Configuration Options Management Configuration Options The Management configuration options are divided into two tables as follows m General Management Configuration Options Table C 9 m Management Trap Configuration Options Table C 10 NOTE A circular symbol identifies configuration options that are available on standalone DSU CSUS only A triangular symbol A identifies configuration options that are available on carrier mounted DSU CSUS only Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 1 of 7 SNMP Mgt Disab Next Enab Disab Prev SNMP Management Enable Specifies whether the DSU CSU responds to SN
254. ring SNMP Traps A trap is an unsolicited message that is sent from the DSU CSU to an SNMP manager when the DSU CSU detects certain pre specified conditions These traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be sent over the communications link You must specify the number of SNMP managers that are to receive traps from this DSU CSU an IP address for each SNMP manager specified and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU CSU For more information refer to Appendix C Configuration Options and SNMP Traps in Chapter 4 Maintenance Enabling SNMP Trap Messages 3 26 p Procedure To enable SNMP trap messages from this DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Alarm selection appears on the screen 5 Select Alarm Edit A User Alarm Mgmt x Je Bt amp 6 Press F1 Next until the SNMP Trap configuration option appears February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 7 Press F2 Enab to enable trap messages over the SNMP management link SNMP Trap A Next Enab Disab A Selecting the Number of Trap Managers If you intend to issu
255. rt 68 Disab Disables bit stuffing so that ones density is not enforced NOTES To comply with Canadian DOC CS 03 regulations equipment installed in Canada must be configured to select 62411 To comply with USA Part 68 regulations equipment installed in the USA must be configured to select Part 68 This configuration option is only available if the network interface line coding format is set to AMI 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 9 C Configuration Options Table C 3 Network Interface Configuration Options 3 of 3 Circuit Ident Next Edit Clear Prev Network Circuit Identifier Specifies the transmission vendor s circuit identifier for the purpose of facilitating troubleshooting The network circuit identifier is an ASCII text string that may be up to 255 characters in length Edit Allows you to edit and or display the network circuit identifier using the generic text string entry screen Clear Allows you to clear the network circuit identifier The network circuit identifier is set to a null string Channel Configuration Options C 10 The Channel configuration options are divided into two tables as follows m DTE Channel Configuration Options Table C 4 m Data Port Channel Configuration Options Table C 5 NOTE Table C 4 DTE Channel Configuration Options and Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options describe the DTE channel and data port channel conf
256. ry 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Pin Assignments Overview The DSU CSU is shipped with a power module and a VF cable Various other interconnecting cables are available For cable feature numbers refer to Appendix Equipment List This appendix describes connector pin assignments and cables T1 Network Interface The T1 network interface connector is an RJ48C 8 position unkeyed modular jack Table D 1 T1 Network Interface Connector The T1 line interface cable is a 20 foot 24 AWG solid 2 twisted pair cable that is either RJU48C to RJ48C Figure D 1 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to RJ48C or RJ48C to DA15P Figure D 2 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to DA15P Table D 1 T1 Network Interface Connector Signal Pin Number Receive Ring 1 Receive Tip Transmit Ring Transmit Tip 2 4 5 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 D Pin Assignments RJ48C RJ48C PLUG PLUG UNKEYED UNKEYED RECEIVE RING TWISTED PAIR RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT RING TRANSMIT TIP 493 14156 01 Figure D 1 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to RJ48C RJ48C PLUG UNKEYED RECEIVE RING RECEIVE TIP WHITE BLUE TRANSMIT RING ORANGE TRANSMIT TIP WHITE ORANGE WHITE ORANGE 493 14342 Figure D 2 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to DA15P D 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 D Pin Assignments DTE Drop Insert Interface 3160 A2 GB21 90 The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface connector i
257. s a DB15 type socket connector Table D 2 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Connector For information about using Relay Contact Sense for external DTE loopback refer to the Extrn DLB configuration option in DTE Interface Configuration Options in Appendix C Configuration Options The DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 cable Figure D 8 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Cable is typically supplied by a DTE vendor It is made of shielded twisted pair wires 22 AWG The cable connector is a DB15 type plug connector Be sure to connect the shield ground only at the DSU CSU end to prevent ground loops Table D 2 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Connector Signal Pin Number Receiver Tip from DTE 1 Receiver Ring from DTE 9 Transmitter Tip to DTE 3 Transmitter Ring to DTE 11 Relay Contact Sense Return 12 Relay Contact Sense 14 Shield Ground 2 4 TWISTED PAIR RECEIVE TIP RECEIVE RING SHIELD GROUND TWISTED PAIR TRANSMIT TIP Dee ccce Olt TRANSMIT RING SHIELD GROUND EXTERNAL RETURN RELAY CONTACT SENSE 494 14152 02 Figure D 3 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Cable February 2001 D 3 D Pin Assignments MODEM Port Interface The integral modem port connector is a 4 position RJ11C like modular jack Table D 3 Modem Port Interface The integral modem VF cable is a 14 5 foot 26 AWG 4 conductor keyed cable with an RJ11C like plug connector Figure D 4 Integral Modem Cable This cable
258. s already in use Call Setup A Pass Dial ChDir x amp 5 From the Dial Directory screen press 1 Up to display the next higher numbered directory or press F2 Down to select the next lower numbered directory Dial a s Down Bul A CS 6 When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen press Dial to place the call Dial a Up Down Dial X lt 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 59 3 Operation Disconnecting the Modem Connection 3 60 The Disconnect command enables you to force a disconnect of an active modem connection from the front panel of the DSU CSU This command is only available when the DSU CSU modem is connected Disconnect methods include m Using the Disconnect command via the front panel menu for all dial connections or when a pass through connection is established to another 316x DSU CSU m Pressing and holding the x and A front panel keys simultaneously when a pass through connection is established to a remote device other than a 316x DSU CSU p Procedure To disconnect an established modem connection using the Disconnect command 1 From the top level menu screen press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen 2 Select Ctrl 3 From the Control screen select Call Control a Es
259. s configurable for all devices only devices that have a direct external connection to an NMS via the COM or AUX ports need a default route set In the following examples the default port COM or AUX is set in the device connected to the LAN Adapter February 2001 F 1 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios Scenario 1 The first scenario Figure F 1 Daisy Chained Standalone at the Central Site is a series of standalone 31xx Series devices daisy chained together with remotes connected via the FDL In this scenario all 31xx Series devices are on the same subnet 135 18 1 0 The subnet mask for each device is FF FF FF 00 A static route is set in the NMS host to subnet 135 18 1 0 ETHERNET 135 18 40 1 LAN ADAPTER SUBNET 135 18 1 0 135 18 1 2 135 18 1 3 lt SUBNET 135 18 40 0 AUX COM IP ADDRESS 135 18 40 2 135 18 1 4 135 18 1 5 SS KE 135 18 1 1 135 18 1 7 135 18 1 6 496 14645 03 Figure 1 Daisy Chained Standalone at the Central Site F 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 F IP Network Addressing Scenarios Scenario 2 The second scenario Figure F 2 Local Carrier with Remote Standalone is a carrier communicating with standalone remotes This scenario is similar to the previous one treating the carrier devices as the daisy chained devices All devices are still on the same subnet and the subnet mask is FF FE FF 00 A static route still must be set in the NMS host to subnet 135 18 2 0
260. s used Mgmt Configures the communication port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system ASCII Configures the communication port as a proprietary ASCII port supporting Front Panel Emulation software and ASCII alarm messages Only one ASCII communication port is allowed per 3000 Series carrier Daisy Configures the communication port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy chained to the auxiliary port of an another 31xx Series device This selection is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Term Configures the communication port as the interface to an async terminal February 2001 C 19 C Configuration Options Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 3 of 10 ComExtDev Disab Next Disab AT Other Prev Carrier Communication Port s External Device Commands Specifies the communication port s external device commands When this configuration option is disabled no commands are sent out the communication port Select AT to have standard attention AT commands sent out the communication port to control the external device Select Other to configure the connect prefix the connect indication string the escape sequence the escape sequence delay and the disconnect string Disab Allows no commands to be sent out the communication port AT Allows standard AT commands to be sent out the communication port Other Allows user configurable commands to be sent out the communication port NOTES
261. s when service is unavailable User Datagram Protocol A TCP IP protocol describing how messages reach application programs within a destination computer Underwriter s Laboratories Inc An organization which promotes product safety An ITU T standard for a low speed 25 position DCE DTE interface February 2001 GL 9 Glossary V 35 V 54 V 54 Loop 2 V 54 Loop 3 Vac Vdc VF WAN warmStart trap XTXC Yellow Alarm GL 10 An ITU T standard for a high speed 34 position DCE DTE interface An ITU T standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests An ITU T standard for a data channel loopback DCLB An ITU T standard for a data terminal loopback DTLB Volts alternating current Volts direct current Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal Wide Area Network A network that spans a large geographic area An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has reinitialized itself External Transmit Clock V 24 circuit 113 An outgoing signal transmitted when a DS1 terminal has determined that it has lost the incoming signal February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Index A abort lamp test 4 36 loopback 4 29 test patterns 4 34 ac power module 1 7 B 1 ACAMI method of channel allocation 3 40 Activ Active configuration area functional description 3 14 addressing See IP Intern
262. sTestType for port n to testLoopDTLB Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest Test Prtns Send QRSS NET Test Prtns Abort Send NET Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendQRSS Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode Test Prtns Send QRSS Prtn Test gt Prtns gt Abort gt Send gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendQRS Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest Test gt Prtns gt Send gt 1in8 Test gt Prtns gt Abort gt Send gt NET Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendOtherTestPattern Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode Test gt Prtns gt Send gt 511 gt Prtn Test gt Prtns gt Abort gt Send gt Prtn Set IfExtnsTestType for port nto testSend511 Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest E 30 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Table E 1 E SNMP MIB Objects SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross Reference 3 of 3 Front Panel Command SNMP MIB Object Test gt Prtns gt Mon gt QRSS gt NET Test gt Prtns gt Abort gt Mon gt NET Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to testMonQRSS Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to noTest Test gt Prtns gt Mon gt QRSS gt Prtn 1 gt gt gt gt Set ifExtnsTestType for port n testMonQRSS Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest Test gt Prtns gt Mon gt 51 1 gt Prtn Test gt Prtns gt Abor
263. sab Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU CSU on this port is not phase inverted InvrtData Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Invert Transmitted and Received Data Specifies whether the port s transmitted data and received data are logically inverted before being transmitted or received This configuration option is useful for applications where HDLC data is being transported Inverting the data ensures that the density requirements for the network interface are met Enab Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are inverted Disab Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are not inverted 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 5 C Configuration Options C 6 Table C 2 Port Configuration Options 4 of 5 EDL Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Embedded Data Link Specifies whether Embedded Data Link EDL is enabled for a particular port If EDL is enabled then 8 kbps of the total bandwidth allocated for this port is not available to the synchronous data port For exampl e if the port rate is 256 kbps 4 DSO channels allocated and EDL is enabled then only 248 kbps is available to the port EDL provides the following detection of frame synchronization CRC of the data stream excluding the 8 kbps EDL and an in band data link 4 kbps between the local and remote units The 4 kbps in band data link can be used for performance report messages and as an IP link for SNMP or Telne
264. sampling period OFF No PDVs were detected on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal during the sampling period BPV Yellow Monitors Bipolar Violations BPV on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal ON At least one BPV was detected and corrected on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal during the sampling period OFF No BPVs were detected on the received DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal during the sampling period 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 7 3 Operation 3 8 Table 3 4 Data Port LEDs Name Color Meaning DTR Green Monitors the state of interchange circuit CD CCITT 108 1 2 Data Terminal Ready received from the synchronous data DTE ON DTR is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE OFF DTR is not being asserted TXD Yellow Monitors activity on interchange circuit BA CCITT 103 Transmitted Data This is the data sent from the synchronous data DTE to the data port on the DSU CSU ON Ones are being received from the synchronous data DTE OFF Zeros are being received from the synchronous data DTE CYCLING Both ones and zeros are being received from the synchronous data DTE RXD Yellow Monitors activity on interchange circuit BB CCITT 104 Received Data This is data sent to the synchronous data DTE from the data port on the DSU CSU ON Ones are being sent to the synchronous data DTE OFF Zeros are bein
265. set is initiated Point to Point Protocol A protocol for packet transmission over serial links specified by Internet RFC 1661 Pseudo Random Bit Sequence A test pattern containing any possible combination of digital ones and zeros for a given string length February 2001 GL 7 Glossary PRM protocol PSTN Ptrns branch pulse density QRSS RAM register Rel branch reset RFC RIP RJ48C RLB Rlpbk branch router RS 232 RS 232 like MIB RS 449 RTS RX RXC RXD SDCP self test GL 8 Performance Report Messages Messages indicating the current state of a T1 line as specified by ANSI T1 403 A set of rules that determines the behavior of devices in achieving and maintaining communication Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known as dial network Test Patterns branch of the DSU CSU menu tree A measure of the number of ones marks pulses in relation to the total number of bits transmitted Quasi Random Signal Source A test pattern simulating a random pattern of digital ones and zeros used to simulate normal transmission Random Access Memory Read write memory that is volatile and loses its contents when power is removed A part of the device s memory that holds stored values Release branch of the DSU CSU menu tree An initialization of the device that occurs at power up or i
266. splaying DSU CSU Test Status 4 37 Front Panel Menu B Technical Specifications B OVGIVIOW ionem sha dri Date a kale ne Dot bw bend acd arena danced B 1 C Configuration Options 1 m DTE Interface Configuration 5 C 2 m Port Configuration 5 C 3 m Network Interface Configuration 5 C 8 m Channel Configuration Options C 10 m General Configuration C 16 User Interface Configuration C 18 m Alarm Configuration Options C 28 m Management Configuration Options C 32 m Configuration 1 42 D Pin Assignments B OVervieW OR rd de a ele ade Ra Rt e RR D 1 m 1 Network D 1 m Drop lnsert Interface D 3 m MODEM D 4 D 5 m COM Port Interface D 6 m EIA 530 A Port Interface Connector D 8
267. st Duration Tst Duration 1 120 Default 10 User Interface Front Panel Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Front Panel Access FP Access Enable Disable Front Panel Pass Through FP Pass Enable Disable User Interface Communication Port Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Port Use Com Use Mgmt ASCII Daisy Terminal Port Type Com Type Asynchronous Synchronous Clock Source Com Clk Internal External Data Rate Com Rate 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 14 4 19 2 38 4 Character Length Char Length 7 8 Parity CParity None Even Odd Stop Bits CStop Bits 1 1 5 2 Ignore Control Leads Ignore DTR Disable DTR Password Required Password Enable Disable Inactivity Timeout Enable Disable Disconnect Time CmDiscTm 1 60 Default 5 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation User Interface External Device Options Front Panel Equivalent Value Default in Bold Nest COM Port Access Com Port Enable Disable External Device Commands ComExtDev Disable AT Other Dial In Access Dial In Enable Disable Connect Prefix ComConnPrefix Text Field Clear Connect Indication String ComConnected Text Field Clear Escape Sequence ComEscapeSeq Text Field Clear Escape Sequence Delay ComEscDel None 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 Sec Disconnect Str
268. st currently active m inProgress 3 A test is currently in progress m notSupported 4 The requested test is not supported m unAbleToRun 5 The requested test cannot run due to the state of the unit Generic Interface Test Table ifExtnsTestCode Object ifExtnsTestEntry 6 This object contains a code that contains more specific information on the test result This object is defined as an object identifier Only the following values are supported by the DSU CSU m No further information is available Used for the send pattern code and loopback tests m inSyncNoBitErrors A monitor pattern QRSS or 511 test has synchronized on the pattern and has not detected any bit errors m inSyncWithBitErrors A monitor pattern QRSS or 511 test has synchronized on the pattern and has detected bit errors m notlnSync A monitor pattern QRSS or 511 test has not synchronized on the requested pattern February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Where these object identifiers are defined as follows m wellKnownCodes OBJECT IDENTIFIER ifExtensions 5 Enterprise MIB 3160 A2 GB21 90 none OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownCodes 1 inSyncNoBitErrors OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownCodes 2 inSyncWithBitErrors OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownCodes 3 notInSync OBJECT IDENTIFIER wellKnownCodes 4 The variable devConfigAreaCopy under the devConfigAreaCopy group in the
269. supported by the DSU CSU This table is supported for the network interface only E 24 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 E SNMP MIB Objects Generic Interface Test Table Generic Interface MIB The test table provides access to additional tests loopbacks and pattern tests that are not in the interface group of MIB II Generic Interface Test Table ifExtnsTestType Object ifExtnsTestEntry 4 This object is a control variable used to start and stop operator initiated tests on the interface It provides the capability to Start stop the Monitor QRSS test pattern on the network interface Start stop the Send QRSS 511 test pattern on a synchronous data port Start sending a V 54 FT1 UP DOWN code to the remote unit for a synchronous data port Start stop the Monitor QRSS 511 test pattern on a synchronous data port Start stop the DCLB DTLB loopback test on a synchronous data port The following object identifiers are used to control the tests on the interface 3160 A2 GB21 90 noTest Stops the test in progress on the interface testFullDuplexLoopBack Initiates a DCLB on the interface Only supported for the data ports testLoopDTLB Initiates a DTLB on the interface Only supported for the data ports testMonQRSS Initiates a Monitor QRSS test on the interface Supported for the data ports and the network interface testMon511 Initiates a Monitor 511 test on the interface Only supported for the data ports t
270. t Clear Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the communication port The subnet mask is set to 000 000 000 000 If the subnet mask is 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 NOTE This configuration option is not available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs if the communication port is disabled Com Link PPP Next PPP SLIP Prev Com Port Link Layer Protocol Specifies the link layer protocol for the communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy PPP Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the communication port SLIP Specifies SLIP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the communication port The communication port must be configured for asynchronous operation to support SLIP This selection does not appear if the Com Use configuration option is set to Daisy NOTE This configuration option is not available on carrier mounted 050 505 if the communication port is disabled 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 35 C Configuration Options C 36 Table C 9 General Management Configuration Options 5 of 7 Modem IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev Modem Port IP Address Specifies the IP address for the modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt Edit Allows you t
271. t PPP Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the modem port SLIP Specifies SLIP protocol as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the modem port The modem port must be configured for asynchronous operation to support SLIP NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only Aux IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev IP Address for the Auxiliary Port Specifies the IP address for the auxiliary port if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy The auxiliary port only supports the PPP link protocol Edit Allows you to edit and or display the IP address for the auxiliary port Clear Allows you to clear the IP address for the auxiliary port The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Aux NetMask Next Edit Clear Prev Subnet Mask for the Auxiliary Port Specifies the subnet mask for the auxiliary port if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy Edit Allows you to edit and or display the subnet mask for the auxiliary port Clear Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the auxiliary port The subnet mask is set to 000 000 000 000 If the subnet mask is 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000
272. t gt Mon gt Prtn Set ifExtnsTestType for port nto testMon51 1 Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest Cnfig gt Load Cnfig Save Set devConfigAreaCopy tothe desired choice Active to Customer etc Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt DTE gt DTE gt Framing Set Display dsx1LineType for DTE T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4 Cnfig Activ Edit DTE DTE Coding Set Display dsx1LineCoding for DTE T1 to dsx1B8ZS or dsx1AMI Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Port gt Prtn gt Port Type Display rs232PortType for port n to rs422 or v35 Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Port gt Prtn gt TxClock Set Display rs232SyncPortClockSource for port n to internal or external Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt NET gt NET gt Framing Set Display dsx1LineType for NET T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4 Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt NET gt NET gt Coding Set Display dsx1LineCoding for NET T1 to dsx1B8ZS or dsx1AMI Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt NET gt ANSI PRM Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt NET gt Mgmt Link Set Display dsx1Fdl for NET T1 to dsx1Ansi T1 403 or dsx1Att 54016 or dsxtother Cnfig Activ Edit Chan DTE Assign Set Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1Fraclfindex for DTE T1 Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Chan gt DTE gt Voice Display dsx1SignalMode for DTE T1 to none or robbeaBit Cnfig gt Activ gt Edit gt Chan gt Prtn gt Assig
273. t DSU CSUs Table C 1 DTE Interface Configuration Options 1 of 2 DTE Port Enab Next Enab Disab Prev DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Port Enables the use of the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 port Enab Allows the use of the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Disab Prohibits the use of the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface NOTE When this configuration option is disabled you cannot display or configure any other DTE Interface configuration options If the clock source configuration option is set to DTE it is changed to NET DTE Framing ESF Factory 1 D4 Factory 2 Next D4 ESF Prev DTE Line Framing Format Designates the framing format for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface D4 Configures for the D4 framing format ESF Configures for the Extended Superframe framing format DTE Coding B8ZS Factory 1 AMI Factory 2 Next AMI 825 Prev DTE Line Coding Format Designates the line coding format to be used on the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface AMI Uses the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format B8ZS Uses the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format Equal 0 133 Next 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Prev DTE Line Equalization Specifies the DTE line equalization compensation parameters that permit a standard DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options
274. t Refresh Figure H 4 Example of Display LEDs Screen H 8 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Changing Configuration Options Use the Configuration branch of the main menu to display or change DSU CSU configuration options Refer to Changing Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Operation and Appendix C Configuration Options If the access level is not Level 1 the message Access level is 2 Configuration is read only is displayed on line 24 Displaying or Editing Configuration Options gt Procedure To display or edit configuration options 1 From the Main Menu screen select Configuration The Load Configuration From screen appears Figure H 5 Configuration Load Screen main config Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Default Factory Configuration 1 Default Factory Configuration 2 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Figure H 5 Configuration Load Screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 9 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation 2 From the Load Configuration From screen select a configuration option set to load Current Customer 1 Customer 2 Default Factory 1 or Default Factory 2 You cannot edit the Default Factory configuration options but you can display them After selecting the set of configuration options to load the Configurat
275. t the internal clock the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or an external clock If external clocking is selected you must use the clock rate configuration option to specify the clock rate Figure 3 12 Common Clocking Configurations shows some common clocking configurations Two sample procedures for configuring timing are given in the following sections Configuring for Network Timing on page 3 47 and Configuring for External Timing on page 3 47 For more information on configuration options refer to Appendix C Configuration Options 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 45 3 Operation NOTE The external clock source is only available for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs For carrier mounted DSU CSUS the external clock provides timing for up to eight slots in the carrier Each Auxiliary Backplane must have its own external clock input NETWORK TERMINAL EQUIPMENT E CLOCK PORT 1 2 3 OR 4 CLOCK NETWORK 496 14341 03 Figure 3 12 Common Clocking Configurations 3 46 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Configuring for Network Timing p gt Procedure To configure for network timing 1 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig 2 Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary 3 Select Edit 4 From the Edit screen press the gt key until the Gen selection appears on the screen 5 Select Gen
276. t of the DSU CSU front panel LCD and LEDs Starting a Lamp Test gt Procedure To start a Lamp test 1 From the top level menu screen select Test 2 From the Test screen press the gt key until the Lamp selection appears on the screen 3 From the Test screen select Lamp Test Lpbk Pirns Lamp A c 7 123 eo 4 From the Lamp Test screen select Start Lamp Test Zw Abort Start X GJ 88 5 3 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 4 35 4 Maintenance 5 The following screens alternately appear on the LCD until you press a Function key to return to the Lamp Test screen In addition all LEDs blink ao PERE EERE EERE 2 m 1 el l9 0123456789 lt gt A OAT SERN A 8 8 8 6 When you are satisfied that all LEDs are lighting and the LCD is functioning properly abort the Lamp test from the Lamp Test screen If there is no activity on the DSU CSU front panel for five minutes the Device Health and Status Screen appears automatically However the Lamp test remains active until it is aborted Aborting a Lamp Test p Procedure To abort the Lamp test 1 Display the Lamp Test screen To do this when the LCD is alternating the Lamp test screens press any Function key Otherwise follow Steps 1 through 3 for starting a Lamp test Lamp Test 2 Abort Start Res Exam Ray
277. t sessions Enab Indicates the ports EDL is enabled Disab Indicates the ports EDL is disabled NOTES This configuration option is only available on 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs Ifthe local DSU CSU s EDL is enabled then the remote DSU CSU s EDL must also be enabled EDL is not recommended for networks in which data is examined for routing purposes e g frame relay x 25 Err Rate 10E 4 Next 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10 8 10E 9 Prev Port Excessive Error Rate Threshold Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an Excessive Error Rate EER condition is declared for a particular port The error rate selected by this configuration option is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC5 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time 10E 4 10E 4 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if more than 1 535 CRC5 errors are detected in a 10 second period It is cleared with less than 1 536 errors in ten seconds 10E 5 10E 5 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if more than 921 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period It is cleared with less than 922 errors in sixty seconds 10E 6 10E 6 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if more than 92 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period It is cleared with less than 93 errors in sixty seconds 10E 7 10E 7 Threshold For example at 1536 kbps EER is declared if m
278. t to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products This product contains a coin cell lithium battery that is only to be replaced at the factory Caution There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same type Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer s instructions Attention Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie
279. tal bandwidth allocated for this port is not available to the synchronous data port For example if you select 256 kbps and EDL is enabled only 248 kbps are available When you enable EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUS on a synchronous data port and the clock source is set to that synchronous data port the external device must provide a clock of 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate For example if you select 64 kbps the external clock source must supply a 56 kbps clock signal Forthe 3164 DSU CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps Thus when entering this menu the rate choices are limited due to this constraint This limitation only occurs in configurations mapping a port to a port or when mapping ports to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface and to the network February 2001 C 13 C Configuration Options Table C 5 Data Port Channel Configuration Options 3 of 4 Data Port Channel Allocation appears for the block and ACAMI methods only Designates the starting DSO channel N1 N24 for the network interface and D1 D24 for the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface Available selections are only those DSO channels that provide enough bandwidth based on the configured data rate to be used as a starting channel number Select the desired starting channel numb
280. ted each time you press the gt key Identity A A 2 1 Identity A 1 eje em 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 9 3 Operation 3 10 Identity Cust ID xxxxxxxx In fre Identity SRevzxx xx xx Identity 1 In e Identity 2 e February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Setting Customer Identification The customer identification is the only identity number you can change It is used to uniquely identify the DSU CSU p Procedure To change the customer identification CID 1 3160 A2 GB21 90 From the top level menu press the gt key until the Ctrl selection appears on the screen Select Ctrl From the Control screen press the gt key until the CID selection appears on the screen Select CID Control x A Reset CID Passwd 2 gt Use the lt keys to position the cursor under the desired character You must enter a character before the gt moves the cursor to the next space to the right CustID xxxxxxxx Down Save EX fri re Enter the desired ID Press F1 Up and F2 Down to scroll and down through the valid ch
281. tem contact Although only 40 characters are displayed for these fields you may enter up to 255 characters The fields scroll as the additional characters are added main control customer id Customer Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Identification Field CUSTOMER ID Customer ID System Name System Location System Contact Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Figure H 3 Customer Identification Screen 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 H 7 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Displaying LED Conditions The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monitored by the Display LEDs screen This screen is most useful when the DSU CSU is being accessed remotely gt Procedure To display LED conditions 1 From the Main Menu screen select Status The Status screen appears 2 From the Status screen select Display LEDs The Display LEDs screen appears Figure H 4 Example of Display LEDs Screen The screen shows a snapshot of the LEDs every 5 seconds LEDs that are illuminated are displayed by inverse video Select Refresh to update the screen main status leds Customer ID Node A Model 31xx Slot xx DISPLAY LEDs NETWORK DTE PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 Sig Sig DTR DTR DTR DTR OOF OOF TXD TXD TXD TXD Alm Alm RXD RXD RXD RXD EER PDV CTS CTS CTS CTS BPV RTS RTS RTS RTS Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exi
282. terface where x is either Network or DTE An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at the Network Interface E Alarm Cleared An Excessive Error Rate at the Network Interface E Yellow Alarm signal received at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE E Alarm Cleared Yellow Alarm signal at the x Interface where x is either Network or DTE Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at synchronous data port n where nis the port number B Alarm Cleared Out Of Frame condition at synchronous data port n where nis the port number An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at synchronous data port n Wherenis the port number WB Alarm Cleared An Excessive Error Rate at synchronous data port n where nis the port number February 2001 4 11 4 Maintenance SNMP Traps 4 12 If two alarm conditions are detected at once the higher priority alarm is reported However if an even higher priority alarm is detected before the first alarm is cleared the later alarm is not reported The alarms listed above are in priority order with the highest priority listed first Alarms remain active until the alarm condition is cleared Also an alarm clear message is only sent when there are no other alarms active For information about alarm configuration options refer to Alarm Configuration Options in Appendix C Configuration Options For troubleshooting information refer to Troubleshooting on page 4 14
283. tervalUAS dsx1IntervalSES SES dsx1IntervalBES BES dsx1IntervalCSS CSS dsx1Validintervals Vidintvl Stat gt Perf gt Telco gt 24 Tot Read the value in the following objects for NET T1 Vidintvl dsx1Validintervals ES dsx1TotalES UAS dsx1TotalUAS dsx1TotalSES dsxiTotalBES CSS dsx1TotalCSS Stat gt Tstat Read LLB Test Acti H BACO ANS dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackContig for Net T1 dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 RLB Test Active DLB Test Active dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 testFullDuplexLoopback from IfExtnsTestType for Port n testLoopDTLB from IfExtnsTestType for Port n dsx1SendOtherTestPattern from dsx1SendCode for Net T1 dsx1SendQRs from dsx1SendCode for Net T1 testSendQRSS from IfExtnsTestType for Port n testSend51 1 from IfExtnsTestType for Port n testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Port n testMon51 1 from ifExtnsTestType for Port n 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 29 E SNMP MIB Objects Table E 1 SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross Reference 2 of 3 Front Panel Command SNMP MIB Object Stat LED Prtn DTR CTS RTS Read rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName dtr rs232outSigState from rs2320utSigName ctr rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName rts Stat gt ID Ser Mod SRev HRevCCA1 HRevCCA2 Read the sysDescr object from th
284. the Dial button 7 The front panel of the selected DSU CSU appears on the PC NOTE When using Front Panel Emulation no LEDs are shown on the PC s screen you must use the Stat command procedure to get LED information see Displaying LED Conditions in Chapter 3 Operation G 4 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Asynchronous Terminal Operation Overview You can configure and manage the DSU CSU from an asynchronous async terminal that is configured for 9 6 kbps 8 characters no parity and 1 stop bit This appendix provides operational examples to help you become familiar with the use of the async terminal for DSU CSU control By convention throughout this appendix examples of screens are shown as they appear with the standalone 4 port DSU CSU Before Using the Asynchronous Terminal You can connect the async terminal directly to the COM port of the DSU CSU or you can establish a remote connection using dial in via the integral modem or Telnet access Before using the async terminal you may use the DSU CSU s front panel to set certain configuration options for async terminal operation Use the Configuration Cnfig branch of the front panel menu and edit the User Interface User configuration options for async terminal operation Refer to Changing Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Operation and Appendix C Configuration Options To connect the async terminal to the DSU CSU using Telnet access refer to Configuring
285. the LED name indicates the condition is ON while an underscore indicates the condition is Off Port n LEDs A _DTR _TXD m 1 el l9 5 Use the lt and gt keys to scroll LED names onto the screen Changing Configuration Options The DSU CSU is an intelligent device that displays only valid options for the current configuration Therefore you are only presented with menu choices that are consistent with the current configuration and operational state of the DSU CSU invalid combinations of configuration options do not appear For example menus displayed for the Model 3160 2 ports and the Model 3164 4 ports differ due to the number of ports available Also if the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface selection is disabled many of the menu choices do not appear Be aware that although all options are shown in this guide what you see on your DSU CSU varies with your configuration The DSU CSU offers configuration options located in the following memory areas Active Activ This is the configuration option set currently active for the DSU CSU Before a configuration option set becomes active for the DSU CSU you must save the set to the Active area When the DSU CSU is shipped from the factory the Active configuration option set is identical to the Factory set This area can be written to and controls the current operation of the device m Customer 1 Cust1 This is the first of two sets of c
286. the Windows environment 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 G 1 G Front Panel Emulation p gt Procedure To install Front Panel Emulation software 1 Insert the diskette into the appropriate drive 2 Select File from Program Manager 3 Choose Run 4 Type A INSTALL and click OK Run Minimized 5 An Information screen appears Choose Continue to continue the installation 6 Type the letter of the destination drive followed by a colon default is C then the appropriate directory name default is C FRONTPAN If the selected directory already exists the following message appears The specified directory already exists Do you want to overwrite the directory If the selected directory is new the following message appears The specified directory does not exist Do you want to create the directory 7 Select Yes A confirmation screen appears Select Install to continue the installation 8 A Setup Completed screen appears Select Continue The Program Manager screen appears with the Front Panel icon G 2 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 G Front Panel Emulation Starting Front Panel Emulation If the DSU CSU selected is not locally attached to the PC you must first dial to the remote DSU CSU before starting front panel emulation The modem attached to the PC must support AT commands for the Front Panel Emulation software to successfully place the call p Procedure To start front panel emulation 1 Fr
287. the communication port None No communication port escape sequence delay X Xs The delay used during the communication port escape sequence where X X is 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 or 1 0 seconds NOTES This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is set to AT or the communication port is disabled ComEscDel must be configured for a delay greater than or equal to the escape guard time required by the external device ComDisconnect Next Edit Clear Prev Carrier Communication Port Disconnect String Specifies the communication port s disconnect string The communication port s disconnect string is sent to the external device if either you or the DSU CSU wants to command the external device to disconnect The external device must be in command mode before this command can be sent so the escape sequence will always be sent before the disconnect string The disconnect string is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length If the disconnect string is NULL then no disconnect string is sent out Edit Allows you to edit and or display the disconnect string using the generic text string entry screen Clear Allows you to clear the disconnect string The disconnect string is set to a null string NOTES This configuration option is available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only A T
288. the cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow key or Ctrl f Moves the cursor back one character to the right Left Arrow key or Ctrl b Moves the cursor back one character to the left Ctrl I Redraws the screen display Return Enter Accepts entry NOTES Some Telnet applications may require the use of Ctrl u Ctrl d Ctrl f and Ctrl b as an alternative to the use of the Up Down Right and Left Arrow keys The following procedures are examples only This appendix uses examples to help you become familiar with the use of the async terminal for DSU CSU control February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 H Asynchronous Terminal Operation Setting Customer Identification The customer identification is used to uniquely identify the DSU CSU gt Procedure To change the customer identification Customer ID 1 From the Main Menu screen select Control The Control screen appears 2 From the Control screen select Customer ID The Customer ID screen appears Figure H 3 Customer Identification Screen 3 Use the Customer ID field to set the customer identification The customer identification may be up to 8 characters long Select Clear to remove all the characters in the associated field 4 Select Save to store the information in nonvolatile memory In addition to the customer identification you may also enter a system name system location and sys
289. the first character in the string unless the first character is B Then it must immediately follow the B T Selects Tone DTMF dialing Tone or Pulse must be specified otherwise Tone is the default This must be the first character in the string unless the first character is B Then it must immediately follow the B Wait for dial tone B Blind dialing you need not wait To be valid this must be the first for a dial tone before entering character in the string the dialing sequence 4 Creates 2 second pause the dialing sequence space Extra characters for readability The space is the default character lt End Of Number EON character terminates the dial string and erases all characters to the right after F3 Save is pressed Initiating a Call for Front Panel Pass Through Operation Front panel pass through initiates a call through the integral modem to access a far end DSU CSU s front panel from your DSU CSU s front panel or PC attached to the COM port NOTE Pass is only available when the FP Pass configuration option has been enabled see Appendix C Configuration Options the active physical interface is either the front panel or the PC and the integral modem is not already in use 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 57 3 Operation p gt Procedure To initiate front panel pass through at the near end DSU CSU 1 From the top level menu
290. the network interface select DTE to assign this port to the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface or press the gt key and the appropriate Function key to assign this port to another port Assign To NET A Next NET DTE A m J 16 e C Press F1 Next to display the appropriate configuration options on the screen Use one of the following examples depending on whether you are assigning by block ACAMI or individual channel February 2001 3 39 3 Operation Block or ACAMI Assignment Method The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port p Procedure To assign by the block or ACAMI method 1 Press F2 for Block or F3 for ACAMI Assign A Next Block ACAMI A eJ Be Assign A Next X m eJ e ME 2 Press F1 Next to display the next configuration option Port Rate 3 Use the lt or key to scroll the desired port rate onto the screen Rates scroll in groups of three Available selections depend on the current base rate selected for the port Press the corresponding Function key to select the port rate Then select Next to display the Start At configuration option on the screen F Port Rate 384 A Next 64 x 1 2 85 e amp For port to port mapping the procedure is complete after the port rate is selected 3 40 Februar
291. ting clear channel signals over a T1 line The ability to reconfigure the DSU CSU and restore data circuits through an external backup device The range of frequencies that can be passed by a transmission medium or the range of electrical frequencies a device is capable of handling Bursty Error Seconds A second in which more than one but less than 320 CRC6 error events have occurred A signal in which successive ones marks pulses are of alternating positive and negative polarity and in which a zero space no pulse is of zero amplitude Binary digit The smallest unit of information representing a choice between a one or a zero sometimes called mark or space The insertion of ones into the outgoing bit stream to enforce ones density requirements A method of allocating digital signal level 0 DSO channels as a group rather than individually Bits per second Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection Bipolar Violation In a bipolar signal a one mark pulse which has the same polarity as its predecessor A sequence of successive bits usually eight handled as a unit in data transmission Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony An advisory committee established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies It was renamed ITU in March 1993 Carrier Detect The received line signal detector V 24 circuit 109 A bidirectional DSO
292. tion 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 4 technical specifications B 2 used with ASCII terminal printer 4 11 used with SNMP system 3 20 Mon Monitor branch example of use 4 17 N NET Network Configuration branch example of use 3 16 option table C 8 option worksheet C 42 network interface cabling example 2 8 channel allocation procedure 3 29 configuration options C 8 failure message 4 2 front panel LED indications 3 6 functional description 1 7 2 1 physical description 1 5 1 6 pin assignments D 1 technical specifications B 2 troubleshooting 4 14 IN 4 February 2001 O objects SNMP 1 3 E 1 OOF Out Of Frame condition ASCII terminal printer message 4 11 Device Health and Status message 4 4 front panel LED indication 3 6 3 7 Performance Report message 4 9 troubleshooting 4 14 options strap See configuration options P pattern tests 4 30 payload loopback PLB 4 24 PBX applications 2 2 PDV Pulse Density Violation condition 3 7 Perf Performance Report branch example of use 4 6 performance reporting 4 5 C 7 physical description of DSU CSU 1 3 B 2 pin assignments D 1 Point to Point Protocol PPP procedure for configuring 3 23 used with SNMP system 1 3 2 3 2 4 3 20 F 1 PORT 1 4 interface channel allocation procedure 3 29 configuration options C 3 failure message 4 2 front panel LED indications 3 8 functional description 1 7 2 1 managed by SNMP E 1 physical
293. tion Options NOTE A circular symbol identifies configuration options that are available on standalone DSU CSUs only A triangular symbol A identifies configuration options that are available on carrier mounted DSU CSUs only Table C 7 User Interface Configuration Options 1 of 10 Self Test Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Initial Self Test Specifies whether the DSU CSU performs a device self test at power up and after a device reset Enab Enables a self test Disab Disables the self test FP Access Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Front Panel Access Determines whether front panel access or display is allowed at the DSU CSU Enab Allows the front panel to access and display data Disab Prevents the access and display of data NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only FP Pass Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Front Panel Pass Through Allows dial out access to a remote DSU CSU using the front panel pass through operation Enab Allows dial out access to a remote DSU CSU Disab Prevents dial out access to a remote DSU CSU NOTE This configuration option is available on standalone DSU CSUs only 6 Dial In Enab Next Enab Disab Prev Dial in Access Allows dial in access to the DSU CSU For standalone DSU CSUs dial in access is through the modem port For carrier mounted DSU CSUS dial in access is through an external device that is connected
294. tion authority or electrician as appropriate If your equipment is in need of repair return it using the procedures described on page A in the front of this document E February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 Contents About This Guide m Document Purpose and Intended Audience vii m Document Summary vii m Product Related Documents viii m Reference ix 1 Introduction ues ceu eR RUBER E ALES du i ene teed teed 1 1 Feat r65 5 e P LEE E E S deed EE EE 1 1 DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 Interface 1 2 Alarm Message 1 2 Front Panel Emulation 1 2 Integral Modem a sasas ya eee eee 1 2 Async Terminal Interface 1 2 Telnet ACCOSS ssa ex Up b whee ER Ge ee 1 2 SNMP Management 1 3 m Physical lt 1 3 Standalone DSU CSU Front 1 3 Standalone DSU CSU Rear Panel 1 5 2 Installation W uo ee bee ee ee etn 2 1 m Application 2 1 SNMP or Telnet Connection 2 3 m
295. to access an object in the MIB Edit Allows you to edit or display the second community name Clear Allows you to clear the second community name Access 2 Read Next Read R W Prev Access 2 Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 2 This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get to the accessible objects in the MIB for this device when community name 2 is used This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs R W Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set to the objects in the MIB for this device when community name 2 is used Write access is allowed for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either read only or read write IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev IP Address for the DSU CSU Specifies the IP address needed to access the DSU CSU Since this IP Address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via the FDL or EDL for 2 port and 4 port DSU CSUs management link Edit Allows you to edit and or display the IP address for the DSU CSU Clear Allows you to clear the IP address for the DSU CSU The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 9 General Management Configuratio
296. twork February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 C Configuration Options Table C 10 Management Trap Configuration Options 1 of 3 Num Trap Mgrs 1 Next 1 2 3 4 5 6 Prev Number of Trap Managers Specifies the number of SNMP trap managers that are to receive traps for this unit NOTE You must configure an IP address for each trap manager that is to receive trap messages Trapn IP Adr Next Edit Clear Prev Trap n IP Address Specifies the IP address for each trap manager This configuration option is repeated for all trap managers supported by the unit Edit Allows you to edit or display the IP address for Trap Manager n Clear Allows you to clear the IP address for Trap Manager n The IP address is set to 000 000 000 000 Trapn Dst None Next None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 EDL3 EDL4 Prev Trap Manager n Destination Specifies the network destination for Trap Manager n This configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers n specified by the Number of Trap Managers configuration option None No Trap Manager network destination Traps are discarded IPBus The Trap Manager n network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane This selection only appears for carrier mounted DSU CSUS which are not configured as the IP Bus Master Com The Trap Manager n network destination is the communication port This selection only appears if the Com Use configuration opt
297. unit represents the software revision number of the unit 2222 222 represents the hardware revision number of the unit SSSSSSSS represents the serial number of the unit System Group sysObjectID Object system 2 This object provides the authoritative identification of the network management subsystem contained in the unit This object displays the following object identifier 3160 Company OID 1 14 2 2 1 3164 Company OID 1 14 2 2 2 3165 Company OID 1 14 2 2 3 3161 Company OID 1 14 2 2 4 System group sysContact Object system 4 This object provides a textual identification of the contact person for this managed node System Group sysName Object system 5 This object provides an administratively assigned name for this managed node System Group sysLocation Object system 6 This object provides the physical location of this node 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 E 3 E SNMP MIB Objects System Group sysServices Object system 7 This object provides a value which indicates the set of services that are potentially offered by the DSU CSU Only the following values are supported m physical 1 Layer 1 functionality for all interfaces m datalink subnetwork 2 Layer 2 functionality SLIP PPP for the COM AUX and MODEM ports m internet 4 Layer functionality IP for all management links m end to end 8 Layer 4 functionality
298. ure To enable or disable the front panel 1 2 From the top level menu screen select Cnfig Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the appropriate Function key Use the scroll keys if necessary Select Edit From the Edit screen press the gt key until the User selection appears the screen Select User Press F1 Next until the FP Access configuration option appears Press F2 to enable the front panel or F3 to disable the front panel FP Access A Next Enab Disab A February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation Using the Integral Modem in Standalone DSU CSUs The standalone DSU CSU s integral modem enables your DSU CSU to communicate with remote devices to display alarm messages or to function as the user interface The carrier mounted DSU CSU does not have an integral modem The Call command available from the Control branch of the menu tree provides the following functions to initiate and terminate modem connections m Pass Initiates a call through the integral modem to access a far end DSU CSU s front panel from your DSU CSU s front panel or PC attached to the COM port m Dial Initiates a call through the integral modem to a printer ASCII terminal or PC Sets up a semipermanent connection to route alarm messages to the specified destination m Disconnect Disconnects an active modem connection
299. ustomer defined configuration options This area can be written to m Customer 2 Cust2 This is the second of two sets of customer defined configuration options This area can be written to m Factory 1 Fact1 This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory This set is determined by what is considered to be the most common configuration used in the DSU CSU market Factory 1 options are read only m Factory 2 Fact2 This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory This set is determined by what is considered to be the second most common configuration used in the DSU CSU market Factory 2 options are read only 3 14 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation The configuration options are divided into functional groups Appendix C Configuration Options contains a list of the configuration options and defaults These groups are DTE Interface Configuration Options Port Configuration Options Network Interface Configuration Options Channel Configuration Options General Configuration Options User Interface Configuration Options Alarm Configuration Options Management Configuration Options The DSU CSU arrives with two preset factory default configuration settings These settings are based on the following Factory 1 ESF framing format with B8ZS line coding format for both the network and the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interfaces Data ports are unassigned Factory 2 D4
300. vice Call Retry Disab Next Enab Disab Prev Call Retry on Alarm or Trap Determines whether a call that cannot be completed busy no answer etc is retried This affects calls that are initiated in attempting to send an alarm or trap message to the modem port or carrier external communication port device If call retry is specified the DSU CSU attempts to complete the call after a configurable delay Enab Enables call retry If enabled the call is retried once per alarm or trap message A delay as specified by the dial out delay time is imposed between call attempts If an alternate dial out directory is specified both the alarm directory as well as the alternate directory are retried once Disab Disables call retry If a call setup cannot be completed it is not retried NOTE For carrier mounted DSU CSUS this configuration option is only available if the communication port is enabled for an external device Dial Delay 5 Next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Prev Dial Out Delay Time on Alarm or Trap Specifies the number of minutes to wait between successive dial out alarms or traps and before a retry attempt after failed alarm dial outs The factory default is 5 minutes NOTE For carrier mounted DSU CSUS this configuration option is only available if the communication port is enabled for an external device 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 C 29 C Configuration Options C 30 Table C 8 Alarm Configurati
301. voice or data path for electrical transmission between two or more points Also called a circuit line link path or facility Assigning specific DSO channels in the device to specific interfaces Network DTE Drop Insert etc Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol A security technique that allows a user password to be encrypted for transmission A letter figure number punctuation or other symbol Customer Identification branch or the DSU CSU menu tree A device that receives a specific service such as database management from a server The external clock interface on the DSU CSU Clear Performance Registers branch of the DSU CSU menu tree Configuration branch of the DSU CSU menu tree A technique used to accommodate the ones density requirements of E1 lines February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 COM port community name COMSPHERE configuration configuration option CPU fail CRC CRC6 CSA CSU Ctrl branch CTS Cust1 Cust2 D4 daisy chaining data port database DB15 connector DB25 connector DCE DCLB default DevFail DevHS branch 3160 A2 GB21 90 Glossary Communications port A computer s serial communications port used to transmit to and receive data from a modem The modem connects directly to this port An identification used by an SNMP manager to grant an SNMP server access rights to a MIB A proprietary product family name and a registered trademark of Paradyne T
302. w The DSU CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is similar to that provided by the DSU CSU front panel The DSU CSU can either be locally or remotely attached to a 386 or higher PC that has at least 4 MB of RAM A copy of the DSU CSU front panel appears on the PC The functionality of the front panel is available by clicking on the Function keys with the mouse rather than by pressing keys from the actual front panel For carrier mounted DSU CSUS a single PC is used to access all of the slots in the carrier The PC is connected locally to a single slot containing either a 3151 CSU or 3161 DSU CSU that has been configured to enable a shared COM port on the Auxiliary Backplane The attached PC can access any 3151 3161 device attached to the Auxiliary Backplane For more information about using the COM port on the carrier refer to the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU CSU General Information Guide Installing Front Panel Emulation Software The Front Panel Emulation software is supplied on a 3 5 inch 1 44 MB double sided high density write protected diskette with 15 sectors per track 80 tracks per side and 96 tracks per inch This software must be installed on a 386 or higher PC with Microsoft Windows Release 3 1 or higher MS DOS 3 3 or higher and at least 4 MB of RAM A VGA color monitor with VGA adapter or higher resolution is required A mouse is also required The following procedures must be performed in
303. xes for all DSU CSU models m 1 NetT1 m 2 DTET1 m 3 port m 4 Modem port m 5 Auxiliary RS 232 port m 6 DCE port 1 m 7 DCE port2 m 8 port m 9 DCE port 4 February 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3160 A2 GB21 90 The supported iflndexes for the 3160 DSU CSU are m NetT1 m DTET m COM port m Modem port m Auxiliary RS 232 port DCE port 1 m DCE port 2 The supported iflndexes for the 3161 carrier DSU CSU are m NetT1 m DTET m COM port if configured m DCE port 1 m DCE port 2 if configured The supported iflndexes for the 3164 DSU CSU are m Net T1 m DTET m COM port m Modem port m Auxiliary RS 232 port m DCE port 1 m DCE port2 m DCE port 3 m DCE port 4 The supported iflndexes for the 3165 DSU CSU are m NetT1 m COM port m Modem port m DCE port 1 February 2001 E SNMP MIB Objects E SNMP MIB Objects Interface Group ifDescr Object ifEntry 2 This object provides information about the interface Each interface displays a text string as shown below Network T1 Network T1 Company Name T1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the CSU board DTE T1 DTE T1 Company Name T1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the CSU board COM COM port Company Name 1 DSU CSU Hardware Version CCA number for the CSU board for the standalone or the CCA number for the DSU board for the carrier Modem MODEM port
304. y 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 4 Maintenance Monitoring Test Patterns 3160 A2 GB21 90 Use the Monitor command to monitor a QRSS test pattern over all the channels on the network interface or to monitor QRSS or 511 test patterns on the channels allocated to an individual port This command provides the number of errors detected in the test pattern 5 digits maximum 99999 p Procedure To monitor a QRSS or 511 test pattern 1 2 From the top level menu screen select Test From the Test screen select Ptrns Test 2 Ripbk Lpbk seal 2 ej E 5 From the Patterns screen select Mon Patterns E ps Send Mon A c J e a From the Patterns Mon screen press F1 for QRSS or F2 for 511 Patterns Mon Es 5 l5 L5 From the Monitor screen press the Function key that corresponds to network or the port for which you want to send a test pattern Use the scroll keys if necessary NET does not appear for the 511 pattern Monitor Name A NET Prti Prt2 2 m 1 el be The Monitor screen appears with the error count If the maximum of 99999 is exceeded OvrF1w appears instead of the count If the receiver loses synchronization while the monitor is active No Syne appears February 2001 4 33 4 Maintenance Aborting Test Patterns Use the Abort command to stop all test patterns or any sel
305. y 2001 3160 A2 GB21 90 3 Operation 4 The Start At screen displays the configuration option used to select the starting DSO channel If the destination selected is the network interface then the network channels appear on the screen If the destination selected is the DTE Drop Insert DSX 1 interface then these channels appear on the Screen The following screen shows an example for the network interface Use the lt 4 or gt gt key to scroll the desired channel onto the screen Use the Function keys to select the starting channel Only those DSO channel numbers that provide enough bandwidth based on the configured data rate to be used as a starting channel number are displayed Channel allocation for this port can only be cleared by selecting Clear Start At Clear E a Next Clear 1 2 Individual Channel Assignment Method The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port p Procedure To assign by the individual channel method 1 Press the gt key once to bring the Chan selection onto the screen Assign By Block a Next Block ACAMI A 1 1 5 e 2 Press Chan Assign By Chan A Block ACAMI Chan A 2 Bee 3 Press F1 Next to display the next configuration option channel allocation 3160 A2 GB21 90 February 2001 3 41 3 Operation 4 Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface

Paradyne 3161-B3 Network Card User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents